Meeting Minutes

Transcript

NO. 2 TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL PROJECT NAME: Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School CLIENT NAME: Montgomery ISD LOCATION: Montgomery, Texas PROJECT NUMBER: 1697-06-01 PROPOSAL DATE: Tuesday, December 20, 2016, 2:00 PM ADDENDUM DATE: Thursday, December 01, 2016 For additional information regarding this project, contact Rodney Ledet at 713-683-8800 THIS ADDENDUM INCLUDES: Civil Items Structural Items Architectural Items Plumbing Items Mechanical Items Electrical Items Technology Items 3 Pages 1 Page 2 Pages 2 Pages 1 Page 2 Pages 1 Page AND ALL ATTACHED REVISED DRAWING REFERENCES IN THE ADDENDUM Project Name: Existing Montgomery ISD Intermediate School Waterline Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 12/01/2016 CIVIL ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: PROJECT MANUAL: AD No 2 , Civil Item 1: To the Project Manual, Section 01 32 23, “SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 2: To the Project Manual, Section 01 55 13.10, “STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 3: To the Project Manual, Section 01 55 26, “TRAFFIC CONTROL,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 4: To the Project Manual, Section 01 57 10, “TPDES REQUIREMENTS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 5: To the Project Manual, Section 01 57 19, “TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 6: To the Project Manual, Section 01 57 23, “TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 7: To the Project Manual, Section 01 74 16, “SITE MAINTENANCE,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 8: To the Project Manual, Section 01 74 19, “CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DISPOSAL,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 9: To the Project Manual, Section 02 41 13.10, “REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 10: To the Project Manual, Section 31 00 00, “EARTHWORK,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 11: To the Project Manual, Section 31 06 20.15, “CEMENT STABILIZED SAND,” 1) Add this section in its entirety Civil Items For Addendum No. # Page 1 of 3 Project Name: Existing Montgomery ISD Intermediate School Waterline Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 AD No 2 , Civil Item 12: To the Project Manual, Section 31 06 20.17, “UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 13: To the Project Manual, Section 31 23 16.14, “TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 14: To the Project Manual, Section 31 23 33, “TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 15: To the Project Manual, Section 31 91 13.13, “TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 16: To the Project Manual, Section 32 92 13, “HYDRO-MULCHING,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 17: To the Project Manual, Section 32 92 23, “SODDING,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 18: To the Project Manual, Section 33 06 10.14, “POLYVINYL CHORIDE (PVC) PIPE,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 19: To the Project Manual, Section 33 06 10.15, “DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 20: To the Project Manual, Section 33 06 40.10, “HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 21: To the Project Manual, Section 33 11 00, “WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 22: To the Project Manual, Section 33 12 13.10, “TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 23: To the Project Manual, Section 33 12 13.12, “WET CONNECTIONS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 24: To the Project Manual, Section 33 12 16, “WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 25: To the Project Manual, Section 33 12 19, “WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 26: To the Project Manual, Section 33 12 40, “VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 27: To the Project Manual, Section 33 13 00, “DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION,” 1) Add this section in its entirety AD No 2 , Civil Item 28: To the Project Manual, Section 33 13 00.10, “HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES,” 1) Add this section in its entirety Civil Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 2 of 3 Project Name: Existing Montgomery ISD Intermediate School Waterline Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 DRAWINGS: AD No 2 , Civil Item 29: To the Drawings, Sheet C1.01, “C4.01,” C7.01, “C7.02 1) General Notes 2) Site and Utility Plan 3) Miscellaneous Details 4) SWPPP Details END OF CIVIL ADDENDUM Civil Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 3 of 3 Project Name: Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 ARCHITECTURAL ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 1 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: PROJECT MANUAL: AD No 2, Arch. Item 1: To the Project Manual, Section 08 7100, “DOOR HARDWARE,” 1) Add new hardware set for Door 1.02B Door: 1.02B Description: Exterior - Mechanical 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Continuous Hinge Storeroom Lock Interchangeable Core Closer w/ Stop Arm Kick Plate Threshold Gasketing Rain Guard Sweep MCK-25HD 28 72 11G04 LL I/CK-7 351 PS K1050 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK 2005AT 2891APK 346C 3452AV CL US26D 626 EN US32D DRAWINGS: AD No 2, Arch. Item 2: To the Drawings, Sheet G1.2, “GENERAL DATA” 1) Revise Alternate 8 to say Repair PA System / Relocate Speakers AD No 2, Arch. Item 3: To the Drawings, Sheet AS1.1, “SITE PLAN” 1) Sheet AS1.1 attached 2) Revise Alternate 2/3 note to reference canopy details on Sheet A9.1. AD No 2, Arch. Item 4: To the Drawings, Sheet AD1.1, “DEMOLITION PLAN – SECTION 1” 1) Sheet AD1.1 attached 2) Cut door opening in room 1.02 AD No 2, Arch. Item 5: To the Drawings, Sheet A1.2, “FLOOR PLAN – SECTION 1” 1) Sheet A1.2 attached 2) Add 6” CFMF wall and HM door into room 1.02 for sprinkler riser room Architectural Items For Addendum No. 1 Page 1 of 2 McKinney Sargent Best Sargent Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Project Name: Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 AD No 2, Arch. Item 6: To the Drawings, Sheet A3.1, “DOOR SCHEDULE AND CONFIGURATIONS” 1) Sheet A3.1 attached 2) Added Exterior HM Door 1.02B AD No 2, Arch. Item 7: To the Drawings, Sheet A3.2, “DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS” 1) Sheet A3.2 attached 2) Added Exterior HM Door details AD No 2, Arch. Item 8: To the Drawings, Sheet A9.1, “TYPICAL DETAILS” 1) Sheet A9.1 attached 2) Added canopy details RFI CLARIFICATION: END OF ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM Architectural Items For Addendum No. 1 Page 2 of 2 Project Name: Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 STRUCTURAL ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 12.1.2016 F-1252 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AS NOTED: DRAWINGS: AD No 2, Struct Item 1: To the Drawings, Sheet S0.2, “DEMOLITION PLAN - SECTION 1,” For clarification, saw cut new opening for new door 1.02B into existing exterior CMU wall and provide new lintel per detail 1/S0.5.1 and 2/0.5.2, as issued per this addendum. Refer to arch drawings for location of the new opening and additional information for the new door. The maximum clear span of the new lintel shall be 3’-4”. AD No 2, Struct Item 2: To the Drawings, Sheet S0.5, “DEMOLITION PLAN - SECTION 4,” 1.) Add new detail 1/S0.5.1 on sheet S0.5, as issued per this addendum, to this sheet. 2.) Add new detail 1/S0.5.2 on sheet S0.5, as issued per this addendum, to this sheet. AD No 2, Struct Item 3: To the Drawings, Sheet S2.5, “FOUNDATION PLAN - SECTION 4,” For clarification, where required at the existing Gymnasium Building (Section 4), provide a new topping slab as required to raise the existing recessed finished floor to match the elevation of adjacent existing finished floor elevation. At all locations where the new topping slab is required, the contractor shall bush-hammer the existing top of concrete surface to create a roughened surface with a minimum amplitude of ¼”. Where the required topping slab thickness is less than 1” in thickness, provide an unreinforced floor levelling compound per the project specifications. Where the required thickness of the topping slab is greater than 1” provide a concrete topping slab using concrete meeting the requirements for “Interior Miscellaneous Concrete” mix design requirements in the project specification, adjusting aggregate size as required based on the required thickness of the topping slab. Where the required thickness of the topping slab is 3” or more, reinforce the topping slab with #3 bars at 12” on center each way and #3 anchors (18” horizontal leg) into Hilti Hit-HY 200 Adhesive Anchor with 3” embedment into the existing slab at 24” on center each way. Prior to installing the topping slab, a bonding agent shall be applied to the existing concrete surface. For proposal purposes only, assume the required topping slab thickness will be 3”. The actual thickness shall be field measured by the contractor. In addition, it is assumed that the existing foundation is a slab on grade foundation. The contractor shall drill and verify that the existing foundation is a slab on grade foundation before pouring the new topping slab. If the contractor discovers that the existing foundation type is not a slab on grade foundation, the contractor shall request in writing from the Structural Engineer further direction before pouring the new topping slab. END OF STRUCTURAL ADDENDUM Structural Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 1 of 1 Project Name: Montgomery Intermediate School Conversion To Elementary School For Montgomery I.S.D. Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 PLUMBING ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: PROJECT MANUAL: AD No 2, Plumb. Item 1: To the Project Manual, Section 21.00.00, “Fire Protection,” x Added section in its entirety AD No 2, Plumb. Item 2: To the Project Manual, Section 21.02.01, “Coordination Drawings,” Added section in its entirety AD No 2, Plumb. Item 3: To the Project Manual, Section 21.05.29, “Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment,” Added section in its entirety AD No 2, Plumb. Item 4: To the Project Manual, Section 21.13.13, “Wet Pipe Sprinkler System,” Added section in its entirety AD No 2, Plumb. Item 5: To the Project Manual, Section 21.13.14, “Wet Pipe Sprinkler System Corrosion Mitigation Program,” x Added section in its entirety REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AS NOTED: Plumbing Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 1 of 2 Project Name: Montgomery Intermediate School Conversion To Elementary School For Montgomery I.S.D. Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 DRAWINGS: AD No 2, Plumb. Item 6: To the Drawings, Sheet MEP1.0, “MEP SITE PLAN ” 1. Added plumbing note 1 and 2; located fire sprinkler entry. AD No 2, Plumb. Item 7: To the Drawings, Sheet P2.1, “Plumbing Plan – Section 1 ” 1. Added plumbing note 12,13,14 located fire sprinkler entry. AD No 2, Plumb. Item 8: To the Drawings, Sheet P2.3, “Plumbing Plan – Section 3 ” 1. Modified waste, vent and water piping in toilet room 3.02, 3.03, 3.09, and 3.10. AD No 2, Plumb. Item 9: To the Drawings, Sheet P4.1, “Plumbing Details and Schedules” 1. Added floor cleanout in plumbing fixture schedule. Plumbing Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 2 of 2 Project Name: Montgomery Intermediate School Conversion To Elementary School For Montgomery I.S.D. Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 MECHANICAL ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: PROJECT MANUAL: DRAWINGS: AD No 2, Mech. Item 1: To the Drawings, Sheet M2.1 – Mechanical Plan – Section 1,” 1. Added electric unit heater in riser room 1.02B 2. Added keyed note 23. AD No 2, Mech. Item 2: To the Drawings, Sheet M2.4– Mechanical Plan – Gymnasium,” 1. Modified keyed note 2, please see attached sheet for update. 2. Modified keyed note on floor plan for window units only AD No 2, Mech. Item 3: To the Drawings, Sheet M4.2, “MECHANICAL SCHEDULES,” 1. Added electric unit heater detail. END OF MECHANICAL ADDENDUM Mechanical Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 1 of 1 Project Name: Montgomery Intermediate School Conversion To Elementary School For Montgomery I.S.D. Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 ELECTRICAL ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: DRAWINGS: AD No 1, Elec. Item 1: To the Drawing, Sheet EL2.1, “LIGHTING PLAN - SECTION 1” 1) Revised keyed note #2 as follows: “ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UNISTALL AND REINSTALL EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES, LIGHTING DEVICES, EXIT SIGNS ETC. AS REQUIRED DUE TO CEILING REPLACEMENT. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE RE-INSTALLED AT SAME LOCATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REFLECTED PLANS DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK. SEE GENERAL NOTE "G" FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.” 2) Add (2) lighting fixtures, one type S1 and one S1E. Provide single pole switch for newly added riser room. Connect lighting fixtures to nearest 277v lighting circuit serving fire riser room area. AD No 1, Elec. Item 2: To the Drawing, Sheet EL2.2, “LIGHTING PLAN - SECTION 2” 1) Revised keyed note #2 as follows: “ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UNISTALL AND REINSTALL EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES, LIGHTING DEVICES, EXIT SIGNS ETC. AS REQUIRED DUE TO CEILING REPLACEMENT. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE RE-INSTALLED AT SAME LOCATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REFLECTED PLANS DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK. SEE GENERAL NOTE "G" FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.” AD No 1, Elec. Item 3: To the Drawing, Sheet EL2.3, “LIGHTING PLAN - SECTION 3” 1) Revised keyed note #2 as follows: “ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UNISTALL AND REINSTALL EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES, LIGHTING DEVICES, EXIT SIGNS ETC. AS REQUIRED DUE TO CEILING REPLACEMENT. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE RE-INSTALLED AT SAME LOCATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REFLECTED PLANS DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK. SEE GENERAL NOTE "G" FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.” AD No 1, Elec. Item 4: To the Drawing, Sheet EP2.1, “POWER PLAN - SECTION 1” 1) Provide convenience receptacle in newly added riser room. Connect to nearest 120v receptacle circuit serving area 2) Provide 480v connection to newly added electrical unit heater. AD No 1, Elec. Item 5: To the Drawing, Sheet EP2.2, “POWER PLAN - SECTION 2” 3) Power and data outlets added for library desk. 4) Keyed notes #12 and #13 added to the sheet. Electrical Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 1 of 2 Project Name: Montgomery Intermediate School Conversion To Elementary School For Montgomery I.S.D. Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 AD No 1, Elec. Item 6: To the Drawing, Sheet E5.1, “ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES” 1) Panel LAA: Added new circuit #36 for library desk Power outlets provide 20Amp 1-pole circuit breaker and #10awg wiring. New circuit breaker shall match existing panelboard AIC rating. 2) New panelboard HHC shall be single section 60 pole in lieu of 42 pole. Provide (6) 20Amp 1-pole spare breakers to spaces 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 and 53. 3) Panel HHF: Connect newly added unit heater in spaces 68,70,72, provide new 15A/3P circuit breaker with #12 wiring hots and ground. 4) Lighting fixture type S1 added: provide Day-Brite #LF4FR-3935-U 4’ LED strip light with frosted lens, wireguard 4000 lumen package and chain hanger kit. 5) Lighting fixture type S1E added: provide Day-Brite #LF4FR-3935-U 4-EMLED’ LED strip light with emergency battery pack, frosted lens, wireguard 4000 lumen package and chain hanger kit. AD No 1, Elec. Item 7: To the Drawing, Sheet FA2.1, “FIRE ALARM PLAN – SECTION 1” 1) Provide fire alarm flow switches and relays to signal main fire alarm panel for fire protection main water entry. 2) Provide fire alarm supervisory switches and relays to signal main fire alarm panel for fire protection main water entry. 3) Keyed notes #3 and #4 added. END OF ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM Electrical Items For Addendum No. 2 Page 2 of 2 Project Name: Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School Client: Montgomery ISD Montgomery, Texas Project Number: 1697-06-01 TECHNOLOGY ITEMS FOR ADDENDUM NO. 2 NOTICE TO PROPOSERS: A. This Addendum shall be considered part of the contract documents for the above-mentioned project as though it had been issued at the same time and incorporated integrally therewith. Where provisions of the following supplementary data differ from those of the original contract documents, this Addendum shall govern and take precedence. B. Proposers are hereby notified that they shall make any necessary adjustments in their estimate on account of this Addendum. It will be construed that each Proposer’s proposal is submitted with full knowledge of all modifications and supplemental data specified therein. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the proposal form. Failure to do so may subject Proposer to disqualification. REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL AS NOTED: DRAWINGS: AD No 2, Tech. Item 1: To the Drawings, Sheet TG1.1 1) Revised General Project Notes #10 to read CONTRACTOR SHALL PRE-TEST AND DOCUMENT ALL EXISTING TECHNOLOGY AND TELECOM DEVICES AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OF CEILINGS AND SPACES. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT IN ALL DEMOLITION AREAS FOR DEVICES, RE-INSTALL ALL EXISTING DEVICES IN NEW CEILINGS. AD No 2, Tech. Item 2: To the Drawings, Sheet T1.2 Responsibility Schedule 2) Added C1 to new Riser room. AD No 2, Tech. Item 3: To the Drawings, Sheet T3.1 1) Added new Riser room door to the ACS door schedule. END OF TECHNOLOGY ADDENDUM Technology Items For Addendum No. # Page 1 of 1 Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 00 00 00 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS No. of Section 01 32 23 01 55 13.10 01 55 26 01 57 10 01 57 19 01 57 23 01 74 16 01 74 19 Title No. of Pages Survey and Layout Data ..................................................................................................................... 2 Stabilized Construction Entrance ....................................................................................................... 4 Traffic Control .................................................................................................................................... 6 TPDES Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 4 Temporary Environmental Controls ................................................................................................... 8 Temporary Storm Water Pollution Control ....................................................................................... 10 Site Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 4 Construction Waste Management and Disposal................................................................................ 2 DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS No. of Section Title No. of Pages 02 41 13.10 Removing Existing Pavement and Structures ................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK No. of Section 31 00 00 31 06 20.15 31 06 20.17 31 23 16.14 31 23 33 Title No. of Pages Earthwork ........................................................................................................................................... 6 Cement Stabilized Sand ..................................................................................................................... 6 Utility Backfill Materials ...................................................................................................................... 8 Trench Safety System ........................................................................................................................ 2 Trenching and Backfilling ................................................................................................................. 14 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. of Section Title No. of Pages 32 91 13.13 Topsoil Placement & Grading ............................................................................................................ 2 32 92 13 Hydro-Mulching .................................................................................................................................. 4 32 92 23 Sodding .............................................................................................................................................. 4 Huckabee 00 00 00 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES No. of Section 33 06 10.14 33 06 10.15 33 06 40.10 33 11 00 33 12 13.10 33 12 13.12 33 12 16 33 12 19 33 12 40 33 13 00 33 13 00.10 Huckabee Title No. of Pages Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe ............................................................................................................ 6 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ............................................................................................................. 4 HDPE Solid and Profile Wall Pipe ..................................................................................................... 6 Water Utility Distribution Piping ........................................................................................................ 14 Tapping Sleeves and Valves .............................................................................................................. 4 Wet Connections................................................................................................................................ 2 Water Utility Distribution Valves ......................................................................................................... 4 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants .............................................................................................. 4 Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults ................................................................................... 6 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution ............................................................................................. 2 Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines ......................................................................................................... 2 00 00 00 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 32 23 - SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA PART 1 1.1 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL A. 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a surveyor acceptable to Owner’s Representative if required by the Contract. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor to Owner’s Representative before starting survey work. C. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. D. Submit certificate signed by Surveyor, that elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B. Prepare a certified survey setting forth dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work upon completion of foundation walls and major site improvements. C. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1. EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting the Work. B. Notify Owner’s Representative immediately if any discrepancies are discovered. SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. The Owner will establish survey control datum as indicated on Drawings. Inform Owner’s Representative in advance of time additional horizontal and vertical control points will be established so verification deemed necessary by Owner’s Representative may be done with minimum inconvenience to the Owner or Contractor. B. Locate and protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. C. Notify Owner’s Representative a minimum of 48 hours before relocation of reference points is needed due to changes in grades or other reasons. D. Promptly report loss or destruction of reference points to Owner’s Representative. E. Reimburse the Owner for cost of reestablishment of permanent reference points disturbed by construction operations. Huckabee 01 32 23 - 1 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.6 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS. A. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B. Establish a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established control points. Record horizontal and vertical location data on Project record documents. C. Establish elevations, lines and levels to provide quantities required for measurement and payment and for appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out the following with appropriate instruments: 1. 2. 3. D. E. Site improvements including grading, fill and topsoil placement, utilities, and footings and slabs. Grid or axis for structures. Building foundation, column locations, and ground floor elevations. Periodically verify layouts. Survey Work shall conform to the requirements of the governing local authorities including datums, benchmarks, finish floor elevations, and submittals. PART 2 P R O D U C T S – Not Used PART 3 E X E C U T I O N – Not Used END OF SECTION 01 32 23 Huckabee 01 32 23 - 2 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 55 13.10 - STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Installation of erosion and sediment control for stabilized construction exits used during construction and until final development of the site. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Stipulated price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price. SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. B. Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements of this Specification. REFERENCES A. PART 2 2.1 2.2 ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. PRODUCTS GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B. Geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C. Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack, mildew, and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. D. Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. COARSE AGGREGATES A. Huckabee Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean, hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings, salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. 01 55 13.10 - 1 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. Coarse aggregates shall conform to the following gradation requirements. Sieve Size (Square Mesh) 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” ¾” No. 4 PART 3 3.1 Percent Retained (By Weight) 0 0 - 20 15 - 50 60 - 80 95 - 100 EXECUTION PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A. If necessary to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicles and equipment, Contractor shall provide stabilized construction roads and exits at the construction, staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. B. No clearing and grubbing or rough cutting shall be permitted until erosion and sediment control systems are in place, other than as specifically directed by the Owner’s Representative to allow soil testing and surveying. C. Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the project site until acceptance of the project or until directed by the Owner’s Representative to remove and discard the existing system. D. Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the stabilized construction roads and exits until the project is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction roads and exits promptly when directed by the Owner’s Representative. Discard removed materials off site in accordance with the requirements of Division 1. E. Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the project. If a project spoil site is not designated on the Drawings, dispose of sediment off site at location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. Sediment to be placed at the project site should be spread evenly throughout the site, compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. F. Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately. G. Conduct all construction operation under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Division 1. Huckabee 01 55 13.10 - 2 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site vehicle transportation routes where shown on Drawings. B. Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Owner’s Representative, of the sizes and locations where shown on Drawings or as specified in this Section. C. Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D. Details for stabilized construction exit are shown on the Drawings. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlaying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E. Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags, gravel, boards, or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F. The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G. The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Drawings, but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than the full width of all points of ingress or regress. H. Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate, thickness, and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit, except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. I. Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Owner’s Representative. J. Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Drawings, or when approved by the City Engineer. These methods include the following: 1. 2. 3. Cement-Stabilized Soil - Compacted cement-stabilized soil or other fill material in an application thickness of at least 8 inches. Wood Mats/Mud Mats - Oak or other hardwood timbers placed edge-to-edge and across support wooden beams which are placed on top of existing soil in an application thickness of at least 6 inches. Steel Mats - Perforated mats placed across perpendicular support members. END OF SECTION 01 55 13.10 Huckabee 01 55 13.10 - 3 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 01 55 13.10 - 4 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 55 26 - TRAFFIC CONTROL PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements for signs, signals, control devices, traffic barriers, flares, lights and traffic signals; construction parking control, designated haul routes, and bridging of trenches and excavations. B. Qualifications and requirements for use of flagmen. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Stipulated price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) B. Article 4413 (29bb), commonly referred to as Private Investigators and Private Security Agencies Act, and Article 2.12, Texas Code of Criminal Procedure. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Traffic control plan: 1. 2. 1.5 If using traffic control plan contained in the Contract without modification, submit a letter confirming use of the plan. If using a different traffic control plan, submit the plan for approval. The plan must conform to TMUTCD requirements and be sealed by a Registered Texas Professional Engineer. C. Submit copies of approved lane closure permits issued by all governmental authorities. D. Submit Schedules of Values for traffic control plan and flagmen within 30 days following Notice to Proceed. E. Submit records verifying qualifications of Uniformed Peace Officers and Certified Flagmen proposed for use on the Work. FLAGMEN A. Use Uniformed Peace Officers and Certified Flagmen to control movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic when construction operations encroach on public traffic lanes. B. Uniformed Peace Officer: Individual employed full-time as a peace officer who receives separate compensation as a privately employed flagman. Private employment may be an employee-employer relationship or on an individual basis. Flagman may not be in the employ of another peace officer nor be a reserve peace officer. Huckabee 01 55 26 - 1 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1. 2. C. Certified Flagman: Individual who receives compensation as a flagman and meets the following qualifications: 1. 2. 3. D. PART 2 2.1 2.2 Formally trained and certified in traffic control procedures by the City’s E. B. Cape Center. Speaks English. Ability to speak Spanish is desirable but not required. Paid for flagman duty at an hourly rate not less than the wage rate set for Rough Carpenter under the City of Houston’s Wage Scale for Engineering Construction. Certified Flagmen must wear a distinctive uniform, bright-colored vest, and be equipped with appropriate flagging and communication devices while at the Work site. They must also have in their possession while on duty, a proof of training identification card issued by the appropriate training institute. PRODUCTS SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES A. Comply with TMUTCD requirements. B. Traffic cones and drums, flares and lights: Conform to local jurisdictions’ requirements. PORTABLE LOW PROFILE CONCRETE BARRIERS A. PART 3 3.1 Uniformed Peace Officers may be: a. Sheriffs and their deputies; b. Constables and deputy constables; c. Marshals or police officers of an incorporated city, town or village; or d. As otherwise provided by Article 2.12, Code of Criminal Procedure. The Uniformed Peace Officer must be a full-time peace officer, must work a minimum average of 32 paid hours per week, and must be paid a rate not less than the prevailing minimum hourly wage rate set by the federal Wage and Hour Act. The individual must be entitled to vacation, holidays, and insurance and retirement benefits. The low profile concrete barrier is a patented design. Information concerning this barrier may be obtained from Texas Transportation Institute, Texas A&M University System, College Station, Texas 77843-3135, (409) 845-1712. EXECUTION PUBLIC ROADS A. Submit requests forms for lane closure and sidewalk closure to the appropriate governmental authority at least three working days prior to need for blocking vehicular lanes or sidewalks. Do not block lanes or sidewalks without approved permits. B. Follow laws and regulations of governing jurisdictions when using public roads. Pay for and obtain permits from jurisdiction before impeding traffic or closing lanes. Coordinate activities with Owner’s Representative. Huckabee 01 55 26 - 2 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.2 3.3 C. Give Owner’s Representative one-week notice before implementing approved traffic control phases. Inform local businesses of impending traffic control activities. D. Notify police department, fire department, METRO, and local schools, churches, and businesses in writing a minimum of five business days prior to beginning work. E. Maintain 10-foot-wide all-weather lanes adjacent to the Work for emergency vehicle use. Keep all-weather lanes free of construction equipment and debris. F. Do not to obstruct normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by Owner’s Representative. G. Maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. Use all-weather materials approved by Owner’s Representative to maintain temporary driveway access to commercial and residential driveways. H. Keep streets entering and leaving job site free of excavated material, debris, and foreign material resulting from construction operations in compliance with applicable ordinances. I. Remove existing signage and striping that conflict with construction activities or that may cause driver confusion. J. Provide safe access for pedestrians along major cross streets. K. Alternate closures of cross streets so that two adjacent cross streets are not closed simultaneously. L. Do not close more than two consecutive esplanade openings at a time without prior approval from Owner’s Representative. CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by emergency vehicles, and the Owner's operations. B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. FLARES AND LIGHTS A. 3.4 Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. HAUL ROUTES A. Utilize haul routes designated by authorities or shown on Drawings for construction traffic. B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. Huckabee 01 55 26 - 3 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.5 3.6 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A. Construct necessary traffic control devices for temporary signals required to complete the Work including loop detectors, traffic signal conduits, traffic signal wiring and crosswalk signals. Notify the governmental agency having jurisdiction a minimum of 60 days in advance of need for control boxes and switchgear. The Contractor will pay for all necessary service, programming or adjustments, to signal boxes and switchgear if required during construction. B. Install and operate traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly traffic flow in areas under Contractor's control affected by Contractor's operations. Post notices, signs and traffic controls before moving into next phase of traffic control. C. Relocate traffic signs and signals as the Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. D. Unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative, provide driveway signs with name of business that can be accessed from each crossover. Use two signs for each crossover. E. Replace existing traffic control devices in Project area. F. Owner’s Representative may direct Contractor to make minor adjustments to traffic control signage to eliminate driver confusion and maintain orderly traffic flow during construction at no additional cost to the Owner. BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A. When necessary, construct bridges over trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic across construction areas and major drives. Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading and install to operate with minimum noise. B. Shore trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. C. Secure bridging against displacement with adjustable cleats, angles, bolts or other devices when: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 3.7 Bridging is placed over existing bus routes, More than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic, More than two separate plates are used for bridging, and When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of 1 foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials such as premix to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. REMOVAL A. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. B. Repair damage caused by installation. C. Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. Huckabee 01 55 26 - 4 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL, REGULATION AND DIRECTION A. Use Flagmen to control, regulate and direct an even flow and movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic, for periods of time as may be required to provide for public safety and convenience, where: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 3.9 Multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single lane vehicular traffic, Vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly, Construction equipment must enter or cross vehicular traffic lanes and walks, Construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and crosswalks, Traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the Work site, and Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. Use of Flagmen to assist in the regulation of traffic flow and movement does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to take other means necessary to protect the Work and public. INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Place temporary pavement for single lane closures, in accordance with TMUTCD. B. Reinstall temporary and permanent pavement markings as approved by Owner’s Representative. When weather conditions do not allow application according to manufacturer’s requirements, alternate markings may be considered. Submit proposed alternate to Owner’s Representative for approval prior to installation. No additional payment will be made for use of alternate markings. 3.10 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL A. Submit name, address and telephone number of individual designated to be responsible for maintenance of traffic handling at construction site to Owner’s Representative. Individual must be accessible at all times to immediately correct deficiencies in equipment and materials used to handle traffic including missing, damaged, or obscured signs, drums, barricades, or pavement markings. B. Inspect signs, barricades, drums, lamps and temporary pavement markings daily to verify that they are visible, in good working order, and conform with traffic handling plans as approved by Owner’s Representative. Immediately repair, clean, relocate, realign, or replace equipment or materials that are not in compliance. C. Keep equipment and materials, signs and pavement markings, clean and free of dust, dirt, grime, oil, mud, or debris. D. Obtain approval of Owner’s Representative to reuse damaged or vandalized signs, drums, and barricades. END OF SECTION 01 55 26 Huckabee 01 55 26 - 5 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 01 55 26 - 6 TRAFFIC CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 57 10 - TPDES REQUIREMENTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Documentation to be prepared and signed by Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) Construction General Permit Number TXR 150000 (the Construction General Permit). B. Implementation, maintenance inspection, and termination of storm water pollution prevention control measures including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment controls, storm water management plans, waste collection and disposal, off-site vehicle tracking, and other appropriate practices shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere in the Contract. C. Review of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) implementation in a meeting with the Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. DEFINITIONS A. Commencement of Construction Activities: The exposure of soil resulting from activities such as clearing, grading, and excavating. B. Large Construction Activity: Project that: 1. 2. C. Small Construction Activity: Project that: 1. 2. D. Disturbs five acres or more, or Disturbs less than five acres but is part of a larger common plan of development that will disturb five acres or more of land. Disturbs one or more acres but less than five acres, or Disturbs less than one acre but is part of a larger common plan of development that will ultimately disturb one or more acres but less than five acres. TPDES Operator: 1. The person or persons who have day-to-day operational control of the construction activities which are necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 for the site or other Construction General Permit conditions. PART 2 P R O D U C T S - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SITE SPECIFIC STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3) A. Prepare a SWP3 following Part III of the Construction General Permit and the applicable local code. If conflicts exist between the Construction General Permit and the local regulations, the more stringent requirements will apply. B. Update or revise the SWP3 as needed during the construction following Part III, Section E of the Construction General Permit. Huckabee 01 57 10 - 1 TPDES REQUIREMENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas C. 3.2 3.3 3.4 NOTICE OF INTENT FOR LARGE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY A. Fill out, sign, and date TCEQ Form 20022 Notice of Intent (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES Construction General Permit (TXR 150000). B. Transmit the signed Contractor’s copy of TCEQ Form 20022, along with a check for the required fee, made out to Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. C. Submission of the Notice of Intent form by the Contractor to TCEQ is required a minimum of two days before Commencement of Construction Activities. CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR SMALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY A. Fill out, sign, and date the Construction Site Notice, Attachment 2 to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, “Construction Site Notice.” B. Transmit the signed Construction Site Notice to the Engineer at least seven days prior to Commencement of Construction Activity. CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. 3.5 Conduct inspections in accordance with TCEQ requirements. Ensure persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures read, fill out, sign, and date the Erosion Control Contractor’s Certification for Inspection and Maintenance. Use the EPA NPDES Construction Inspection Form RETENTION OF RECORDS A. 3.6 Submit the SWP3 and any updates or revisions to the Owner’s Representative for review and address comments prior to commencing, or continuing, construction activities. Keep a copy of this document and the SWP3 in a readily accessible location at the construction site from Commencement of Construction Activity until submission of the Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES Construction General Permit (TXR 150000). Contractors with day-to-day operational control over SWP3 implementation shall have a copy of the SWP3 available at a central location, on-site, for the use of all operators and those identified as having responsibilities under the SWP3. Upon submission of the NOT, submit all required forms and a copy of the SWP3 with all revisions to the Owner’s Representative. REQUIRED NOTICES A. Post the following notices from effective date of the SWP3 until date of final site stabilization as defined in the Construction General Permit: 1. Post the TPDES permit number for Large Construction Activity, or a signed TCEQ Construction Site Notice for Small Construction Activity. A signed copy of the Contractor’s NOI must also be posted. 2. Post notices near the main entrance of the construction site in a prominent place for public viewing. Post name and telephone number of Contractor’s local contact person, brief project description and location of the SWP3. a. If posting near a main entrance is not feasible due to safety concerns, coordinate posting of notice with the Owner’s Representative to conform to requirements of the Construction General Permit. Huckabee 01 57 10 - 2 TPDES REQUIREMENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3. 4. 3.7 b. If Project is a linear construction project (e.g.: road, utilities, etc.), post notice in a publicly accessible location near active construction. Move notice as necessary. Post a notice to equipment and vehicles operators, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post at each stabilized construction exit area. Post a notice of waste disposal procedures in a readily visible location on site. ON-SITE WASTE MATERIAL STORAGE A. On-site waste material storage shall be self-contained and shall satisfy appropriate local, state, and federal rules and regulations. B. Prepare list of waste material to be stored on-site. Update list as necessary to include update information. Keep a copy of updated list with the SWP3. to- C. Prepare description of controls to reduce pollutants generated from on-site storage. Include storage practices necessary to minimize exposure of materials to storm water, and spill prevention and response measures consistent with best management practices. Keep a copy of the description with the SWP3. 3.8 NOTICE OF TERMINATION A. Submit a NOT to TCEQ and the Engineer within 30 days after: 1. 2. 3. Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Contractor; or Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been stabilized; and All silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled to be removed as defined in the SWP3, or transferred to a new operator if the new operator has sought permit coverage. END OF SECTION 01 57 10 Huckabee 01 57 10 - 3 TPDES REQUIREMENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 01 57 10 - 4 TPDES REQUIREMENTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 57 19 – TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 1.1 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trenches, shaft excavations, structural excavations and foundation beds in stable condition, and controlling ground water conditions for tunnel excavations. B. Protecting work against surface runoff and rising floodwaters. C. Trapping suspended sediment in the discharge form the surface and ground water control systems. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 GENERAL Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction of Soils Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3) B. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) C. Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities prepared by City of Houston, Harris County and Harris County Flood Control District. DEFINITIONS A. Ground water control system: system used to dewater and depressurize water-bearing soil layers. 1. 2. Dewatering: lowering the water table and intercepting seepage that would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations, or into tunnels and shafts; and disposing of removed water. Intent of dewatering is to increase stability of tunnel excavations and excavated slopes, prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations, reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing, improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material, prevent failure or heaving of bottom of excavations, and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. Depressurization: includes reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, necessary to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom or instability of tunnel excavations. B. Excavation drainage: includes keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. C. Surface drainage: includes use of temporary drainage ditches and dikes and installation of temporary culverts and sump pumps with discharge lines necessary to protect Work from any source of surface water. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 1 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas D. 1.5 Monitoring facilities for ground water control system: includes piezometers, monitoring wells and flow meters for observing and recording flow rates. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. Submit proposed method and spacing of readings for review prior to obtaining water level readings. B. Design ground water control system, compatible with requirements of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1926 and Division 2 to produce following results: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Effectively reduce hydrostatic pressure affecting: a. Excavations b. Tunnel excavation, face stability or seepage into tunnels Develop substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities and other work Prevent loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of foundation strata Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations C. Provide ground water control systems that include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D. Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from other sources entering excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E. Provide ditches, berms, pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. F. Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. G. Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and settlement or resultant damage caused by ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, adjacent water wells, or potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of system to protect property as required. H. Install an adequate number of piezometers installed at proper locations and depths, necessary to provide meaningful observations of conditions affecting excavation, adjacent structures and water wells. I. Install environmental monitoring wells at proper locations and depths necessary to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into work area or ground water control system. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 2 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by Owner’s Representative prior to start of excavation work. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Submit following records upon completion of initial installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells Initial flow rates Submit the following records weekly during control of ground and surface water operations: 1. 2. 1.7 Results of subsurface investigations and description of extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control Names of equipment Suppliers and installation Subcontractors Description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria and operation and maintenance procedures Description of proposed monitoring facilities indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics Description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other means Surface water control and drainage installations Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to Paragraph 3.02, Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers and monitoring wells. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality regulations and Texas Water Well Drillers Association for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C. Obtain necessary permits from agencies with jurisdiction over use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Since review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to obtain required approvals. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 3 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas D. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Select equipment and materials necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review by Owner’s Representative through submittals required in Paragraph 1.06, Submittals. B. Use experienced contractors, regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation, to furnish and install and operate eductors, well points, or deep wells, when needed. C. Maintain equipment in good repair and operating condition. D. Keep sufficient standby equipment and materials available to ensure continuous operation, where required. E. Portable Sediment Tank System: Standard 55-gallon steel or plastic drums, free of hazardous material contamination. 1. PART 3 3.1 Shop or field fabricate tanks in series with main inlet pipe, inter-tank pipes and discharge pipes, using quantities sufficient to collect sediments from discharge water. EXECUTION GROUND WATER CONTROL A. Perform necessary subsurface investigation to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine draw down characteristics. Present results in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan submittal. B. Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C. Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing of changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with notification. D. Provide continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E. Monitor operations to verify systems lower ground water piezometric levels at rate required to maintain dry excavation resulting in stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 4 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas F. Depressurize zones where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavations to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Define allowable piezometric elevations in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. G. Removal of ground water control installations. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.2 Remove pumping system components and piping when ground water control is no longer required. Remove piezometers, including piezometers installed during design phase investigations and left for Contractor’s use, upon completion of testing, as required in accordance with Part 3 of applicable specification. Remove monitoring wells when directed by Owner’s Representative. Grout abandoned well and piezometer holes. Fill piping that is not removed with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout. H. During backfilling, maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. Do not allow the water level to cause uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement-stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I. Provide uniform pipe diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drains when no longer required. If pipe removal is impractical, grout connections at 50foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout after removal from service. J. The extent of ground water control for structures with permanent perforated underground drainage systems may be reduced, for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means to drain affected portions of underground systems, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage systems during construction operations. K. Remove systems upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L. Compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. M. Foundation Slab: Maintain saturation line at least 3 feet below lowest elevations where concrete is to be placed. Drain foundations in areas where concrete is to be placed before placing reinforcing steel. Keep free from water for 3 days after concrete is placed. REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A. For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between each eductor well or well point and discharge header to allow visual monitoring of discharge from each installation. B. Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are pre-drained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for selected method of work. C. Install piezometers or monitoring wells at least one week in advance of the start of associated excavation. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 5 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 3.4 3.5 D. Dewatering may be omitted for portions of under drains or other excavations, where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is pre-drained by existing systems and that ground water control plan criteria are satisfied. E. Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F. Provide additional ground water control installations, or change method of control if, ground water control plan does not provide satisfactory results based on performance criteria defined by plan and by specifications. Submit revised plan according to Paragraph 1.06B. SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Install sediment tank as shown on approved plan. B. Inspect daily and clean out tank when one-third of sediment tank is filled with sediment. SEDIMENT SUMP PIT A. Install sediment sump pits as shown on approved plan. B. Construct standpipe by perforating 12 inch to 24-inch diameter corrugated metal or PVC pipe. C. Extend standpipe 12 inches to 18 inches above lip of pit. D. Convey discharge of water pumped from standpipe to sediment trapping device. E. Fill sites of sump pits, compact to density of surrounding soil and stabilize surface when construction is complete. EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A. 3.6 Use excavation drainage methods if well-drained conditions can be achieved. Excavation drainage may consist of layers of crushed stone and filter fabric, and sump pumping, in combination with sufficient ground water control wells to maintain stable excavation and backfill conditions. MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A. Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while ground water control installations or excavation drainage is operating at the site, or water is seeping into tunnels, and maintain systems in good operating condition. B. Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedules. C. Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make specified observations. D. Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside of excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by Owner’s Representative. Huckabee 01 57 19 - 6 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.7 3.8 MONITORING AND RECORDING A. Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also, monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. Record observations daily until steady conditions are achieved and twice weekly thereafter. B. Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Owner’s Representative determines more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Owner’s Representative's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches, curb walls, pipes, sumps or other approved means. Requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B. Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by agencies. END OF SECTION 01 57 19 Huckabee 01 57 19 - 7 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 01 57 19 - 8 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 57 23 – TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Implementation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWP3) described in Division 1. B. Installation and maintenance of storm-water pollution prevention structures: diversion dikes, interceptor dikes, diversion swales, interceptor swales, down spout extenders, pipe slope drains, paved flumes and level spreaders. Structures are used during construction and prior to final development of the site. C. Filter Fabric Fences: 1. 2. D. 1.2 Straw Bale Fence. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum) Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for Work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. 1.4 Type 1: Temporary filter fabric fences for erosion and sediment control in nonchannelized flow areas. Type 2: Temporary reinforced filter fabric fences for erosion and sediment control in channelized flow areas. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort [12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)]. D3786 - Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength for Knitted Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics. D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Ultraviolet Light and Water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus). D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. D 4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products. D 6382 - Standard Practice for Dynamic Mechanical Analysis and Thermogravimetry of Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane Material. Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities prepared by City of Houston, Harris County and Harris County Flood Control District. SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Huckabee Filter Fabric Fence Type 1 and Type 2: Install to allow surface or channel runoff percolation through fabric in sheet-flow manner and to retain and accumulate sediment. Maintain Filter Fabric Fences to remain in proper position and configuration at all times. 01 57 23 - 1 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.5 B. Straw Bale Fence: Install to allow surface runoff percolation through straw in sheet-flow manner and to retain and accumulate sediment. Maintain Straw Bale Fence to remain in proper position and configuration at all times. C. Interceptor Dikes and Swales: Construct to direct surface or channel runoff around the project area or runoff from project area into sediment traps. D. Drop Inlet Baskets: Install to allow runoff percolation through the basket and to retain and accumulate sediment. Clean accumulation of sediment to prevent clogging and backups. E. Sediment traps: Construct to pool surface runoff from construction area to allow sediment to settle onto the bottom of trap. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile or filter fabrics, outlet pipe, perforated riser and connectors. D. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence of operations for stormwater pollution prevention structures. E. Submit shop drawings for Drop Inlet Baskets. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS CONCRETE A. 2.2 2.3 Concrete: Class B in accordance with Division 32 or as shown on the Drawings. AGREGATE MATERIALS A. Use poorly graded cobbles with diameter greater than 3 inches and less than 5 inches. B. Provide gravel lining in accordance with Division 31 or as shown on the drawings. C. Provide clean cobbles and gravel consisting of crushed concrete or stone. Use clean, hard crushed concrete or stone free from adherent coatings, salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic matter. D. Sediment Pump Pit Aggregate: Use nominal 2-inch diameter river gravel. PIPE A. Polyethylene culvert pipe or PVC sewer pipe in accordance with Division 33 or as shown on the Drawings. B. Inlet Pipes: Galvanized steel pipe in accordance with Division 33 or as shown on the Drawings. C. Standpipe for Sediment Pump Pits: Galvanized round culvert pipe or round PVC pipe, minimum of 12-inch and a maximum of 24-inch diameter, perforate at 6 to 12 inch centers around circumference. Huckabee 01 57 23 - 2 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.4 2.5 2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC A. Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material, in continuous rolls of longest practical length. B. Grab Strength: 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), Mullen burst strength >200 psi (ASTM D-3786), and equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C. Furnish ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers for minimum 6 months of expected usable construction life at temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D. Mirafi, Inc., Synthetic Industries, or equivalent. FENCING A. Wire Fencing: Woven galvanized steel wire, 14 gauge by 6-inch square mesh spacing, minimum 24 inch roll or sheet width of longest practical length. B. Fence Stakes: Nominal 2 x 2 inch moisture-resistant treated wood or steel posts (min. of 1.25 lbs. per linear foot and Brinell Hardness greater than 140) with safety caps on top; length as required for minimum 8 inch bury and full height of filter fabric. SANDBAGS A. Provide woven material made of polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyamide material. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.7 2.8 Minimum unit weight of four ounces per square yard. Minimum grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D4632). Mullen burst strength exceeding 300 psi (ASTM D3786). Ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. Size: Length: 18 to 24 inches. Width: 12 to 18 inches. Thickness: 6 to 8 inches. Weight: 50 to 125 pounds. DROP INLET BASKET A. Provide steel frame members in accordance with ASTM A36. B. Construct top frame of basket with two short sides of 2 inch by 2 inch and single long side of 1 inch by 1 inch, 1/8 inch angle iron. Construct basket hangers of 2 inch by 1/4 inch iron bars. Construct bottom frame of 1 inch by 1/4 inch iron bar or 1/4 inch plate with center 3 inches removed. Use minimum 1/4 inch diameter iron rods or equivalent for sides of inlet basket. Weld minimum of 14 rods in place between top frame/basket hanger and bottom frame. Exact dimensions for top frame and insert basket will be determined based on dimensions of type of inlet being protected. STRAW BALE A. Straw: Standard-baled agricultural hay bound by wire, nylon, or polypropylene rope. Do not use jute or cotton binding. B. Straw Bale Stakes (applicable where bales are on soil): No. 3 (3/8 diameter) reinforcing bars, deformed or smooth at Contractor's option, length as required for minimum 18 inch bury and full height bales. PART 3 EXECUTION Huckabee 01 57 23 - 3 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.1 3.2 PREPARATION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Provide erosion and sediment control structures at locations shown on the Drawings. B. Do not clear, grub or rough cut until erosion and sediment control systems are in place unless approved by Project Manger to allow installation of erosion and sediment control systems, soil testing and surveying. C. Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within project site until acceptance of Project or until directed by Project Manger to remove and discard existing system. D. Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of erosion and sediment control structures. Unless otherwise directed, maintain erosion and sediment control structure until project area stabilization is accepted. . Redress and replace granular fill at outlets as needed to replenish depleted granular fill. Remove erosion and sediment control structures promptly when directed by Project Manger. Dispose of materials in accordance with Division 1. E. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a project spoil site is not designated on Drawings, dispose of sediment off site at approved location in accordance with Division 1. F. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, compact embankments, excavations, and trenches in accordance with Division 31. G. Prohibit equipment and vehicles from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated right of way and easements for construction. Immediately repair damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control structures. H. Protect existing trees and plants in accordance with Division 1. SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Install sediment traps so that surface runoff shall percolate through system in sheet flow fashion and allow retention and accumulation of sediment. B. Inspect sediment traps after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. C. Use fill material for embankment in accordance with Division 31. D. Excavation length and height shall be as specified on Drawings. Use side slopes of 2:1 or flatter. E. Stone outlet sediment traps: 1. 2. Huckabee Maintain minimum of 6 inches between top of core material and top of stone outlet, minimum of 4 inches between bottom of core material and existing ground and minimum of 1 foot between top of stone outlet and top of embankment. Embed cobbles minimum of 4 inches into existing ground for stone outlet. Core shall be minimum of 1 foot in height and in width and wrapped in triple layer of geotextile filter fabric. 01 57 23 - 4 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 F. Sediment Basin with Pipe Outlet Construction Methods: Install outlet pipe and riser as shown on the Drawings. G. Remove sediment deposits when design basin volume is reduced by one-third or sediment level is one foot below principal spillway crest, whichever is less. FILTER FABRIC FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Fence Type 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Install stakes 3 feet on center maximum and firmly embed minimum 8 inches in soil. If filter fabric is factory pre-assembled with support netting, then maximum support spacing is 8 feet. Install wood stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. Trench in the toe of the fence lines so the downward face of the trenches is flat and perpendicular to direction of flow. V-trench configuration as shown on Drawings may also be used. Lay fabric along edges of trenches in longest practical continuous runs to minimize joints. Make joints only at a support post. Splice with minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. Staple filter fabric to stakes at maximum 3 inches on center. Extend fabric minimum 18 inches and maximum 36 inches above natural ground. Backfill and compact trench. Fence Type 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Layout fence same as for Type 1. Install stakes at 6 feet on center maximum and at each joint in wire fence, firmly embedded 1-foot minimum, and inclined it as for Type 1. Tie wire fence to stakes with wire at 6 inches on center maximum. Overlap joints minimum one bay of mesh. Install trench same as for Type 1. Fasten filter fabric wire fence with tie wires at 3 inches on center maximum. Layout fabric same as for Type 1. Fasten to wire fence with wire ties at 3 inches on center maximum and, if applicable, to stakes above top of wire fence it as for Type 1. Backfill and compact trench. C. Attach filter fabric to wooden fence stakes spaced a maximum of 6 feet apart or steel fence stakes spaced a maximum of 8 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 12 inches. Install stakes at a slight angle toward source of anticipated runoff. D. Trench in toe of filter fabric fence with spade or mechanical trencher so that downward face of trench is flat and perpendicular to direction of flow. A V-trench configuration may also be used. Lay filter fabric along edges of trench. Backfill and compact trench upon completion of Construction. E. Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. F. Cut length of fence to minimize use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice fabric together only at support post with minimum 6 inch overlap and seal securely. G. Triangular Filter Fabric Fence Construction Methods Huckabee 01 57 23 - 5 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier Construction Methods 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.4 Attach filter fabric to wire fencing, 18 inches on each side. Provide a fabric cover and skirt with continuous wrapping of fabric. Skirt should form continuous extension of fabric on upstream side of fence. Secure triangular fabric filter fence in place using one of the following methods: a. Toe-in skirt 6 inches with mechanically compacted material; b. Weight down skirt with continuous layer of 3-inch to 5-inch graded rock; or c. Trench-in entire structure 4 inches. Anchor triangular fabric filter fence structure and skirt securely in place using 6-inch wire staples on 2-foot centers on both edges and on skirt, or staked using 18-inch by 3/8-inch diameter re-bar with tee ends. Lap fabric filter material by 6 inches to cover segment joints. Fasten joints with galvanized shoat rings. Attach woven wire fence to fence stakes. Securely fasten filter fabric material to wire fence with tie wires. When used in swales, ditches or diversions, elevation of barrier at top of filter fabric at flow line location in channel shall be lower than bottom elevation of filter fabric at ends of barrier or top of bank, whichever is less, in order to keep storm water discharge in channel from overtopping bank. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches depth one-third height of barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. DIKE AND SWALE A. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain minimum dike height of 18 inches, measured from cleared ground at up slope toe to top of dike. Maintain side slopes of 2:1 or flatter. B. Dike and Swale Stabilization: When shown on the Drawings, place gravel lining 3 inches thick and compacted into the soil or 6 inches thick if truck crossing is expected. Extend gravel lining across bottom and up both sides of swale minimum height of 8 inches vertically, above bottom. Gravel lining on dike side shall extend up the up slope side of dike a minimum height of 8 inches, measured vertically from interface of existing or graded ground and up slope toe of dike, as shown on Drawings. C. Divert flow from dikes and swales to sediment basins, stabilized outlets, or sediment trapping devices of types and at locations shown on Drawings. Grade dikes and swales as shown on Drawings, or, if not specified, provide positive drainage with maximum grade of 1 percent to outlet or basin. D. Clear in accordance with Division 31. E. Carry out excavation for swale construction so that erosion and water pollution is minimal. Minimum depth shall be 1 foot and bottom width shall be 4 feet, with level swale bottom. Excavation slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. Clear, grub and strip excavation area of vegetation and root material. Huckabee 01 57 23 - 6 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.5 DOWN SPOUT EXTENDER A. 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 Down spout extender shall have slope of approximately 1 percent. Use pipe diameter of 4 inches or as shown on the Drawings. Place pipe in accordance with Division 33. PIPE SLOPE DRAIN A. Compact soil around and under drain entrance section to top of embankment in lifts appropriately sized for method of compaction utilized. B. Inlet pipe shall have slope of 1 percent or greater. Use pipe diameter as shown on the Drawings. C. Top of embankment over inlet pipe and embankments directing water to pipe shall be at least 1 foot higher at all points than top of inlet pipe. D. Pipe shall be secured with hold-down grommets spaced 10 feet on centers. E. Place riprap apron with a depth equal to pipe diameter with 2:1 side slopes. PAVED FLUME A. Compact soil around and under the entrance section to top of the embankment in lifts appropriately sized for method of compaction utilized. B. Construct subgrade to required elevations. Remove and replace soft sections and unsuitable material. Compact subgrade thoroughly and shape to a smooth, uniform surface. C. Construct permanent paved flumes in accordance with Drawings. D. Remove sediment from riprap apron when sediment has accumulated to depth of one foot. LEVEL SPREADER A. Construct level spreader on undisturbed soil and not on fill. Ensure that spreader lip is level for uniform spreading of storm runoff. B. Maintain at required depth, grade, and cross section as specified on Drawings. Remove sediment deposits as well as projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow. INLET PROTECTION BARRIER A. Place sandbags and filter fabric fences at locations shown on the SWP3. 3.10 DROP INLET BASKET CONSTRUCTION METHODS. A. Fit inlet insert basket into inlet without gaps around insert at locations shown on the SWP3. B. Support for inlet insert basket shall consist of fabricated metal as shown on Drawings. C. Push down and form filter fabric to shape of basket. Use sheet of fabric large enough to be supported by basket frame when holding sediment and extend at least 6 inches past frame. Place inlet grates over basket/frame to serve as fabric anchor. D. Remove sediment deposit after each storm event and whenever accumulation exceeds 1inch depth during weekly inspections. Huckabee 01 57 23 - 7 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.11 STRAW BALE FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Place bales in row with ends tightly abutting adjacent bales. Place bales with bindings parallel to ground surface. B. Embed bale in soil a minimum of 4 inches. C. Securely anchor bales in place with Straw Bale Stakes driven through bales a minimum of 18-inches into ground. Angle first stake in each bale toward previously laid bale to force bales together. D. Fill gaps between bales with straw to prevent water from channeling between bales. Wedge carefully in order not to separate bales. E. Replace with new straw bale fence every two months or as required by Owner’s Representative. 3.12 BRUSH BERM CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Construct brush berm along contour lines by hand placing method. Do not use machine placement of brush berm. B. Use woody brush and branches having diameter less than 2-inches with 6­inches overlap. Avoid incorporation of annual weeds and soil into brush berm. C. Use minimum height of 18-inches measured from top of existing ground at upslope toe to top of berm. Top width shall be 24 inches minimum and side slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. D. Embed brush berm into soil a minimum of 4-inches and anchor using wire, nylon or polypropylene rope across berm with a minimum tension of 50 pounds. Tie rope securely to 18-inch x 3/8-inch diameter rebar stakes driven into ground on 4-foot centers on both sides of berm. 3.13 STREET AND SIDEWALK CLEANING A. Keep areas clean of construction debris and mud carried by construction vehicles and equipment. If necessary, install stabilized construction exits at construction, staging, storage, and disposal areas, following Division 1. B. In lieu of or in addition to stabilized construction exits, shovel or sweep pavements as required to keep areas clean. Do not water hose or sweep debris and mud off street into adjacent areas, except, hose sidewalks during off-peak hours, after sweeping. 3.14 WASTE COLLECTION AREAS A. Huckabee Prevent water runoff from passing through waste collection areas, and prevent water runoff from waste collection areas migrating outside collection areas. 01 57 23 - 8 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.15 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose, so fuels, lubricants, solvents, and other potential pollutants are not washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid and solid waste. Clean and inspect maintenance areas daily. B. Where designated equipment maintenance areas are not feasible, take precautions during each individual repair or maintenance operation to prevent potential pollutants from washing into streams or conveyance systems. Provide temporary waste disposal receptacles. 3.16 VEHICLE/ EQUIPMENT WASHING AREAS A. Install wash area (stabilized with coarse aggregate) adjacent to stabilized construction exit(s), as required to prevent mud and dirt run-off. Release wash water into drainage swales or inlets protected by erosion and sediment controls. Build wash areas following Division 1. Install gravel or rock base beneath wash areas. B. Wash vehicles only at designated wash areas. Do not wash vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment at locations where runoff flows directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems. C. Locate wash areas to spread out and evaporate or infiltrate wash water directly into ground, or collect runoff in temporary holding or seepage basins. 3.17 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A. Control surface water, runoff, subsurface water, and water from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the site, or adjoining properties. B. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas, and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses to prevent erosion, sedimentation or damage. C. Provide, operate, and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface water. D. Dispose of drainage water to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to the site or adjoining areas. Follow environmental requirements. E. Retain existing drainage patterns external to the site by constructing temporary earth berms, sedimentation basins, retaining areas, and temporary ground cover as required to control conditions. F. Plan and execute construction and earth work to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. 2. Hold area of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum. Provide temporary controls such as berms, dikes, and drains. G. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode. H. Inspect earthwork periodically to detect start of erosion. Immediately apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. Huckabee 01 57 23 - 9 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas I. Dispose of sediments offsite, not in or adjacent to streams or floodplains, nor allow sediments to flush into streams or drainage ways. Assume responsibility for offsite disposal location. J. Unless otherwise indicated, compact embankments, excavations, and trenches by mechanically blading, tamping, and rolling soil in maximum of 8­inch layers. Provide compaction density at minimum 90 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D-698-78 density. Make at least one test per 500 cubic yards of embankment. K. Do not maneuver vehicles on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Immediately repair damage to erosion and sedimentation control systems caused by construction traffic. L. Do not damage existing trees intended to remain. 3.18 REMOVAL OF CONTROLS A. Remove erosion and sediment controls when the site is finally stabilized or as directed by Owner’s Representative. B. Dispose of sediments and waste products following Division 1. END OF SECTION 01 57 23 Huckabee 01 57 23 - 10 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 74 16 - SITE MAINTENANCE PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 1.5 Restoration of site affected by the Work in public or private property, including pavement, esplanades, sidewalks, driveways, fences, lawns and landscaping. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price. DEFINITIONS A. Phase: Locations identified on the plans and listed in Division 1. B. Site Restoration: Replacement or reconstruction of Site Improvements located in rights-ofway, easements, public property, and private property affected or altered by the Work. C. Site Improvement: Includes pavement, curbs and gutters, esplanades, sidewalks, driveways, fences, lawns, irrigation systems, landscaping, and other improvements in existence at the Project site before commencement of construction operations. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. C. Schedule of testing, service connections, abandonment, backfill, and site restoration. Sample of notices to residents outlining their responsibility for maintenance of site improvements adjacent to the Project that are not disturbed by construction operations. SCHEDULING A. Schedule testing, service connections, abandonment, backfill and site restoration immediately following completion of pipe laying work or paving within each block or line segment. B. Phased Construction: 1. C. Construction of Projects with no Phases listed in Division 1: 1. 2. Huckabee Commencement of subsequent Phase will follow scheduling of site restoration of prior Phase. Limit work to a maximum of two Phases of the project. Complete site restoration prior to disturbing over 50% of total project linear feet or 2,000 linear feet, whichever is greater, of right-of-way or easement. Limit work to a maximum of 50% of total project linear feet or 2,000 linear feet, whichever is greater, of right-of-way and easement. Commence work in additional right-of-way or easement after completion of site restoration. 01 74 16 - 1 SITE MAINTENANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas PART 2 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement, Sidewalks and Driveways: Materials specified in Division 32. B. Seeding and Sodding: Sod specified in Division 32. C. Trees, Shrubs and Plantings: Conform to requirements of Division 1. PART 3 3.1 PRODUCTS EXECUTION Preparatory Work A. Provide cleanup and restoration crews to work closely behind pipe laying and roadway construction crews, and where necessary, during testing, service restoration, abandonment, backfill and surface restoration. B. Water Lines: Unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. C. Wastewater Lines: 1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. Once Owner’s Representative approves work within a Line Segment or block, immediately begin preparatory work for testing effort. No later than three days after completing preparatory work for testing, initiate testing work. Immediately after testing begin site restoration. Street Construction and Paving Projects 1. 2. Huckabee Once Owner’s Representative approves work within a Line Segment, immediately begin preparatory work for testing effort. No later than three days after completing preparatory work for testing, initiate testing work. Immediately after transfer of service connections, begin abandonment of old wastewater lines, and site restoration. Street Construction and Paving Projects 1. E. Once Owner’s Representative approves work within a Phase, immediately begin preparatory work for disinfection effort. No later than three days after completing disinfection preparatory work, initiate disinfection work. Immediately after transfer of services, begin abandonment of old water lines and site restoration. Once Owner’s Representative approves work within a block, immediately begin preparatory work for sidewalk construction, sodding and hydromulching and tree planting. No later than seven days after completing preparatory work, initiate construction. 01 74 16 - 2 SITE MAINTENANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.2 CLEANING A. 3.3 Remove debris and trash to maintain a clean and orderly site in accordance with requirements of General Conditions and Division 1. LANDSCAPING AND FENCES A. Seeding and Sodding. 1. 2. 3. B. Trees, Shrubbery and Plants. 1. C. Remove and replant trees, shrubs, and plants in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Fence Replacement. 1. 2. 3.4 Remove construction debris and level area with bank sand so that new grass surface matches level of existing grass and maintains pre-construction drainage patterns. Level and fill minor ruts or depressions caused by construction operations with bank sand, where grass is still viable. Restore previously existing turfed areas with sod and fertilize in accordance with Division 32. Sod to match existing turf. Restore unpaved areas not requiring sodding with hydromulch seeding conforming to Division 32. Replace removed or damaged fencing to equal or better condition than existed prior to construction, including concrete footings and mow strips. Provide new wood posts, top and bottom railing and panels. Metal fencing material, not damaged by the Work, may be reused. Remove and dispose of damaged or substandard material. MAINTENANCE A. Maintain shrubs, plantings, sodded areas and seeded areas. B. Replace shrubs, plantings and seeded or sodded areas that fail to become established. C. Refer to Division 1 for maintenance requirements. END OF SECTION 01 74 16 Huckabee 01 74 16 - 3 SITE MAINTENANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 01 74 16 - 4 SITE MAINTENANCE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 01 74 19 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Contractor shall obtain all required permits prior to disposal of excess material in areas designated as being in "100-year Flood Hazard Area." C. Obtain and submit disposal permits for proposed disposal sites, if required by local ordinances. D. Submit copy of written permission from property owner, with description of property, prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to Project. Submit written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. E. Describe waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to reduce Pollutants from these materials, including storage practices to minimize exposure of materials to storm water; and spill prevention and response measures in the Project’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Refer to Division 1. PART 2 P R O D U C T S -Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Excavated Material: When indicated on Drawings, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at location or locations approved by the Architect and/or Owner. B. Base, Surface, and Bedding Material: Load shell, gravel, bituminous, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage into Owner’s designated trucks. C. Pipe Culvert: Load culverts designated for salvage into Owner’s designated trucks. D. Other Salvageable Materials: Conform to requirements of individual Specification Sections. E. Coordinate loading of salvageable material on Owner’s trucks with Owner’s Representative. F. The Contractor shall dispose of all items the Owner refuses in conformance with the requirements of Division 1 at no additional cost to the Owner. Huckabee 01 74 19 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.2 EXCESS MATERIAL A. Remove and legally dispose of vegetation, rubble, broken concrete, debris, asphaltic concrete pavement, excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage from job site. B. Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to Project when written permission is obtained from property owner. See Paragraph 1.02 D above. C. Verify flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in area designated as within 100-year Flood Hazard Area unless a permit has been obtained. Remove excess material placed in "100-year Flood Hazard Area" without a permit, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Remove waste materials from site daily, in order to maintain site in neat and orderly condition. END OF SECTION 01 74 19 Huckabee 01 74 19 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 02 41 13.10 - REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 A. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. B. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks, and driveways. C. Removing pipe culverts and sewers. D. Removing existing inlets and manholes. E. Removing miscellaneous structures of concrete or masonry. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris. B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies. PART 2 P R O D U C T S – Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 A. Obtain advance approval from Engineer for dimensions and limits of removal work. B. Identify known utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations. PROTECTION A. Protect the following from damage or displacement: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.3 Adjacent public and private property. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain. Utilities designated to remain. Pavement and utility structures designated to remain. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain. REMOVALS A. Remove pavements and structures by methods that will not damage underground utilities. Do not use a drop hammer near existing underground utilities. B. Minimize amount of earth loaded during removal operations. C. Where existing pavement is to remain, make straight saw cuts in existing pavement to provide clean breaks prior to removal. Do not break concrete pavement or base with Huckabee 02 41 13.10 - 1 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas drop hammer unless concrete or base has been saw cut to a minimum depth of two (2) inches. 3.4 D. Where street and driveway saw cut locations coincide or fall within three (3) feet of existing construction or expansion joints, break out to existing joint. E. Remove sidewalks and curbs to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint. F. Where existing end of pipe culvert or end of sewer is to remain, install an 8-inch thick masonry plug in pipe end prior to backfill. BACKFILL A. 3.5 Backfill of removal areas shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 31. DISPOSAL A. Inlet frames, grates, plates, and manhole frames and covers may remain property of the Owner. Disposal shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal. B. Remove from the site debris resulting from work under this section in accordance with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. END OF SECTION 02 41 13.10 Huckabee 02 41 13.10 - 2 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Operations required for the excavation of materials on site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 1.2 The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to character, quantity and distribution of material to be excavated. EXISTING UTILITIES A. 1.3 Operations required for the excavation of borrow material from approved sources. Compaction of natural subgrades. Placement and compaction of embankments to grade. Finish grading. Disposal of excess or unsuitable materials. Other required operations. Earthwork must conform with dimensions and typical sections shown, and within lines and grades established on the Drawings. The plans show the approximate location of all known underground utility lines and structures. Where pipes, ducts and other structures are encountered in the excavation but are not shown on the plans, immediately notify the Owner's Representative. CLASSIFICATIONS A. Top Soil: Top 6 inches of natural surface soil possessing the characteristics of representative soils on the site that produce growths of grass or other vegetation. Topsoil includes grasses and other vegetation. B. Subgrade: Consists of that portion of the surface on which a compacted embankment or pavement is constructed. C. Compacted Embankment: Earth fill placed and compacted between subgrade and underside of pavement and fill areas adjacent to paving. D. Borrow: Material taken from approved sources to make up any deficit of excavated material. The borrow shall have a measured plasticity index of between 7 and 20, and shall be free of organic matter and excess silt. E. Finish Grading: Operations required for smoothing disturbed areas that are not overlaid with pavement. F. Stripping of Ground Surface: All vegetation, all decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable material within the areas to be graded not removed by clearing shall be stripped or otherwise removed to ground level before grading or other earthwork is started. In no case will such material be allowed to remain in or on the areas to be graded. G. Excavation: After all necessary stripping has been done, excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered within the grading limits of the project shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Huckabee 31 00 00 - 1 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas H. PART 2 2.1 Compaction: Compaction of soil materials shall be measured as a percentage of Standard Proctor density as determined by the AASHTO Standard T 99 procedure. PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT A. Furnish, operate and maintain such equipment as is necessary to produce uniform layers, section and smoothness of grade for compaction and drainage. B. Tamping Rollers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Rubber Tire Rollers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 Use tamping rollers with one or more cylindrical drums. Each cylinder must be at least 48 inches long and 40 inches in diameter. The minimum weight per linear foot of drum length must be 1500 pounds weighted and 1000 pounds empty. For tamping rollers with multiple cylinders, each cylinder must rotate independently and the cylinders must be pivoted on the main frame so that the units can adapt to irregularities in the ground surface. Provide approximately 2.7 tamping feet per square foot of drum surface on each cylinder. Stagger the feet uniformly over the cylinder surface. Each foot should have a face area between 5 and 7 square inches and a clear projection from the cylinder surface of 7 to 9 inches. Equip each unit with a device for cleaning the feet as the cylinders rotate. Use a crawler tractor with sufficient power to pull the tamping roller at a speed of approximately 3.0 miles per hour. Use rubber tire rollers having two axles and not less than a total of nine wheels with pneumatic tires. Mount the wheels so that the rear tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward tires and so the unit will give uniform compaction over the entire width of coverage. Mount the axles in a rigid frame with a loading platform or body suitable for being ballasted to a specified gross weight between 10 and 50 tons loading. The Owner's Representative will specify the tire inflation and gross weight. If the roller is not self propelled, the towing equipment must also have pneumatic tires. D. Use tank trucks, pressure distributors or other equipment designed to apply water uniformly and in controlled quantities to variable surface widths. E. Scarifiers, disks, spring tooth or spike tooth harrows, earth hauling equipment and other equipment must be suitable for construction of fills. EARTH FILL A. Obtain embankment fill from required excavation or, if excavated material is not sufficient, from Borrow areas approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Use the best material available from excavation or borrow. Suitability of fill material is subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. C. Fill material must be free of excessive silts. Do not use soil containing brush, roots, sod or similar perishable material. D. Embankment material must have a plasticity index between 7 and 20 inclusive. Huckabee 31 00 00 - 2 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas PART 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXECUTION REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL A. Remove topsoil within the limits of the construction areas as shown on the Drawings. B. Stockpile the topsoil for future distribution. Protect stockpiled topsoil from other excavated materials. EXCAVATION A. As shown on the Drawings, excavate to lines, grades and elevations required for subsequent construction of embankments or pavement. Remove materials within the indicated limits and dispose of as directed. B. Maintain grades during excavation for complete drainage. When required, install temporary drains or drainage ditches to intercept or divert surface water and prevent interference or delay of the Work. C. If at time of excavation it is not possible to place material in the proper section of permanent construction, stockpile the material in approved areas for later use. D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 2 inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in top 6 inches of subgrade. E. Uniformly dress cut and fill slopes to slope, cross section and alignment, as shown. SUBGRADE UNDER PAVEMENTS A. 3.4 After excavation is made to subgrade lines under proposed pavements, remove and replace soft or undesirable material with select material as specified for embankments. Stabilize and compact the subgrade as stated in the sections on stabilization of pavement subgrade. TREATMENT OF NATURAL SUBGRADE UNDER EMBANKMENTS A. After excavation is made to lines under proposed embankments, remove soft or undesirable material to a depth determined by the Owner's Representative. Break down sides or holes or depressions to flatten the slopes. B. Fill each depression with the appropriate soil for the materials to be placed on the subgrade. Place the fill in layers moistened and compacted as specified in this section. C. After depressions have been filled and immediately before placement of compacted fill in a section of the embankment, thoroughly loosen the foundation material to a depth of 6 inches. Remove roots and debris turned up while loosening the soil. D. Compact the surface of the embankment subgrade as specified in the following paragraphs. E. Take care to prepare the embankment so that planes of seepage or weakness are not induced. Should the Owner's Representative suspect such a deficiency, the material must be thoroughly broken and recompacted before proceeding with construction. Huckabee 31 00 00 - 3 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.5 3.6 3.7 PLACING EMBANKMENT FILL A. Do not place fill on any part of the embankment subgrade until the subgrade preparation has been inspected by the Owner's Representative. B. During the dumping and spreading process, remove all roots, stones and debris that are uncovered in the embankment material. C. After dumping, spread the material in horizontal layers over the entire fill area. The thickness of each layer before compaction must not exceed 8 inches unless otherwise directed. As soon as possible after placement begins, crown the surface to drain freely and maintain such conditions throughout construction. D. If the compacted surface of a layer is too smooth to bond with succeeding layers, loosen the surface by harrowing or other approved method before continuing the work. E. Stabilize and compact the top 6 inches of embankment fills under pavement sections as specified in the section on stabilization of pavement subgrade. MOISTURE CONTROL A. Developing the maximum density obtainable with the natural moisture of the embankment material is preferred. However, the moisture content must be 1 to 3 percentage points wet of optimum, as determined by AASHTO Test Method T 99. B. If the moisture content is too high, adjust to within the specified limits by spreading the material and permitting it to dry. Assist the drying process by discing or harrowing if necessary. When the material is too dry, sprinkle each layer with water. Work the moisture into the soil by harrowing or other approved method. COMPACTION A. 3.8 Compact each layer of embankment with suitable rollers as necessary to secure at least 95% of the standard Proctor density, within the specified range of the moisture content, according to AASHTO Test Method T 99. DISTRIBUTION OF TOPSOIL A. Preparation: 1. 2. 3. B. Placement: 1. Huckabee Prior to placing topsoil, scarify the subgrade to a depth of 2 inches to provide effective bonding of the topsoil with the subgrade. Use a chisel plow with the chisels set 10 inches apart. Shape all areas designated for grading, including cut and fill areas, to receive a minimum of 6 inches of topsoil. In areas that require only blading and dressing, the adequacy of existing topsoil will be determined by the Owner's Representative. Do not haul or place wet topsoil. Also prohibited is placement of topsoil on a subgrade that is excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise detrimental to proper grading or proposed planting. 31 00 00 - 4 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2. 3. C. 3.9 Distribute topsoil uniformly and spread evenly to an average thickness of 6 inches. Do no compact topsoil. Correct irregularities in the surface to prevent formation of depressions where water could stand. Perform the spreading operation so that planting can proceed with little additional tillage or soil preparation. Leave the area smooth and suitable for lawn planting. Where any portion of the surface becomes eroded or otherwise damaged, repair the affected area to establish the condition and grade prior to topsoil placement. Replace topsoil. MATERIAL DISPOSAL A. Remove excess excavated material and excess topsoil from the area before substantial completion. Stockpile materials separately in designated areas. Excess soil, topsoil and strippings shall become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. B. Dispose of waste material without causing expense or damage to the Owner. END OF SECTION 31 00 00 Huckabee 31 00 00 - 5 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 31 00 00 - 6 EARTHWORK Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 31 06 20.15 - CEMENT STABILIZED SAND PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Cement stabilized sand. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (Fine Aggregate). B. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. C. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Methods for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. D. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. E. ASTM C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate. F. ASTM C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates. G. ASTM C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement. H. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil CementMixtures. I. ASTM D 1632 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory. J. ASTM D 1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders. K. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). L. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). M. ASTM D 3665 - Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials. N. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit proposed target cement content and production data for sand-cement mixture in accordance with requirements of Paragraph 2.03, Materials Qualifications. Huckabee 31 06 20.15 - 1 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Use sand-cement mixture producing minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch (psi) in 48 hours. 1. 2. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Cement: Type I Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B. Sand: Clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33, or requirements for bank run sand of Division 2 and the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. C. 2.2 2.3 Design will be based on strength specimens molded in accordance with ASTM D 558 at moisture content within 3 percent of optimum and within 4 hours of batching. Determine minimum cement content from production data and statistical history. Provide no less than 1.5 sacks of cement per ton of dry sand. Classified as SW, SP, SW-SM, SP-SM, or SM by Unified Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. Deleterious materials: a. Clay lumps, ASTM C 142 - less than 0.5 percent. b. Lightweight pieces, ASTM C 123; less than 5.0 percent. c. Organic impurities, ASTM C 40, color no darker than standard color. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. Water: Potable water, free of oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. MIXING MATERIALS A. Add required amount of water and mix thoroughly in pugmill-type mixer. B. Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading. Reject material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing. MATERIAL QUALIFICATION A. Determine target cement content of material as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Huckabee Obtain samples of sand-cement mixtures at production facility representing range of cement content consisting of at least three points. Complete molding of samples within 4 hours after addition of water. Perform strength tests (average of two specimens) at 48 hours and 7 days. Perform cement content tests on each sample. Perform moisture content tests on each sample. Plot average 48-hour strength vs. cement content. Record scale calibration date, sample date, sample time, molding time, cement feed dial settings, and silo pressure (if applicable). 31 06 20.15 - 2 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. Test raw sand for following properties at point of entry into pug-mill: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Present data obtained in format similar to that provided in sample data form attached to this Section. D. The target content may be adjusted when statistical history so indicates. For determination of minimum product performance use formula: f'c% 1/2 standard deviation PART 3 3.1 3.2 Gradation Plasticity index Organic impurities Clay lumps and friable particles Lightweight pieces Moisture content Classification EXECUTION PLACING A. Place sand-cement mixture in maximum 12-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to 95 percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified. Refer to related specifications for thickness of lifts in other applications. Target moisture content during compaction is +3 percent of optimum. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at plant. B. Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1. B. One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabililized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665. Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. C. Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D 558, Method A, without adjusting moisture content. Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used, but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. D. After molding, specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. E. Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. F. A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. G. Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. Huckabee 31 06 20.15 - 3 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas H. Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum, the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 3.3 Supplier and plant number Time material was batched Time material was sampled Test age (exact hours) Average 48-hour strength Average 7-day strength Specification section number Indication of compliance / non-compliance Mixture identification 3 Truck and ticket numbers The time of molding Moisture content at time of molding Required strength Test method designations Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 Supplier mixture identification Specimen diameter and height, in. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. ACCEPTANCE A. Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. 2. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. All 7-day individual strength tests (average of two specimens) are greater than or equal to 100 psi. B. Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test (average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C. The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractor’s expense when individual strength test (average of two specimens) has 7-day strength less than 70 psi. D. When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi, discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material, which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E. Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor, Owner’s Representative, and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F. If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases, three (3) cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G. Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three (3) cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that Huckabee 31 06 20.15 - 4 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 70 psi. Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. B. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi, material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment. Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard = $30.00 x 2 (100 psi - Actual psi) 100 C. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 31 06 20.15 Huckabee 31 06 20.15 - 5 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 31 06 20.15 - 6 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 31 06 20.17 - UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Material Classifications. B. Utility Backfill Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C. 1.2 Material Handling and Quality Control Requirements. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Concrete sand Gem sand Pea gravel Crushed stone Crushed concrete Bank run sand Select backfill Random backfill Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. DEFINITIONS A. Unsuitable Material: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Materials classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according to ASTM D 2487. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. Materials containing large clods, aggregates, or stones greater than 4 inches in any dimension; debris, vegetation, or waste; or any other deleterious materials. Materials contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. Suitable Material: 1. 2. Materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable materials meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with lime or cement. C. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I requirements and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill where needed to provide stable support for structure foundation base. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete fill and seal slabs. D. Foundation Base: Crushed stone aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. Foundation base provides smooth, level working surface for construction of concrete foundation. E. Backfill Material: Classified soil material meeting specified quality requirements for designated application as embedment or trench zone backfill. Huckabee 31 06 20.17 - 1 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.4 1.5 F. Embedment Material: Soil material placed under controlled conditions within embedment zone extending vertically upward from top of foundation to an elevation 12 inches above top of pipe, and including pipe bedding, haunching and initial backfill. G. Trench Zone Backfill: Classified soil material meeting specified quality requirements and placed under controlled conditions in trench zone from top of embedment zone to base course in paved areas or to surface grading material in unpaved areas. H. Foundation: Either suitable soil of trench bottom or material placed as backfill of overexcavation for removal and replacement of unsuitable or otherwise unstable soils. I. Source: Source selected by Contractor for supply of embedment or trench zone backfill material. Selected source may be project excavation, off-site borrow pits, commercial borrow pits, or sand and aggregate production or manufacturing plants. J. Refer to Division 33 for other definitions regarding utility installation by trench construction. REFERENCES A. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate. B. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. C. ASTM C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate. D. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in Los Angeles Machine. E. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. F. ASTM C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates. G. ASTM D 1140 - Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than No. 200 Sieve. H. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). I. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. J. ASTM D 4643 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by Microwave Oven Method. K. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Determining Particle Size Analysis of Soils. L. TxDOT Tex-460-A - Material Finer Than 75 Fm (No.200) Sieve In Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates). SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit description of source, material classification and product description, production method, and application of backfill materials. Huckabee 31 06 20.17 - 2 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.6 C. Submit test results for samples of off-site backfill materials. Comply with Paragraph 2.03, Material Testing. D. Before stockpiling materials, submit copy of approval from landowner for stockpiling backfill material on private property. E. Provide delivery ticket which includes source location for each delivery of material that is obtained from off-site sources or is being paid as specific bid item. TESTS A. Perform tests of sources for backfill material in accordance with Paragraph 2.03B. B. Verification tests of backfill materials may be performed by Owner in accordance with Division 1. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A. Classify materials for backfill for purpose of quality control in accordance with Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. Material use and application is defined in utility installation specifications and Drawings either by class, as described in Paragraph 2.01B, or by product descriptions, as given in Paragraph 2.02. B. Class Designations Based on Laboratory Testing: 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well-graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. b. 2. 3. 4. Huckabee Plasticity index: non-plastic. Gradation: D60/D10 - greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve less than or equal to 5 percent. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines (GM, GP, SP, SM): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: 1) Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. 2) Gradation (GM, SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 12 percent and 50 percent. 3) Borderline gradations with dual classifications (e.g., SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 5 percent and 12 percent. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay (GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 12 percent and 50 percent. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: 1) Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. 2) Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. 31 06 20.17 - 3 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 5. 6. 2.2 c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to more restrictive class. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A. Soils classified as silt (ML) silty clay (CL-ML with PI of 4 to 7), elastic silt (MH), organic clay and organic silt (OL, OH), and organic matter (PT) are not acceptable as backfill materials. These soils may be used for site grading and restoration in unimproved areas as approved by Owner’s Representative. Soils in Class IVB, fat clay (CH) may be used as backfill materials where allowed by applicable backfill installation specification. Refer to Division 31. B. Provide backfill material that is free of stones greater than 6 inches, free of roots, waste, debris, trash, organic material, unstable material, non-soil matter, hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to following limits for deleterious materials: 1. 2. 3. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. C. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete, may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in product specification, and approved by Owner’s Representative, provided that physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. D. Bank Run Sand: Durable bank run sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting following requirements: 1. 2. Huckabee Less than 15 percent passing number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. Amount of clay lumps or balls may not exceed 2 percent. Material passing number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. 31 06 20.17 - 4 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas E. Concrete Sand: Natural sand, manufactured sand, or combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: Sieve 3/8" No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 F. Gem Sand: Sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: Sieve 3/8” No. 4 No. 8 G. Percent Passing 100 85 to 100 10 to 30 0 to 10 0 to 5 Crushed Aggregates: Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Huckabee Percent Passing 95 to 100 60 to 80 15 to 40 Pea Gravel: Durable particles composed of small, smooth, rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: Sieve 1/2” 3/8” No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 H. Percent Passing 100 95 to 100 80 to 100 50 to 85 25 to 60 10 to 30 2 to 10 Materials of one product delivered for same construction activity from single source, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. Non-plastic fines. Los Angeles abrasion test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. Crushed aggregate shall have minimum of 90 percent of particles retained on No. 4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by Tex-460-A, Part I. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel, sized by crushing to predominantly angular particles from naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel is not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on applicable utility embedment drawing details. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material, free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris. 31 06 20.17 - 5 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with Tex-110-E. Sieve 1” ¾” ½” 3/8” No. 4 No. 8 2.3 Percent Passing by Weight for Pipe Embedment By Ranges of Nominal Pipes Sizes >15” 15” – 8” < 8” 95 – 100 100 -60 – 90 90 – 100 100 25 – 60 -90 – 100 -20 – 55 40 – 70 0–5 0 – 10 0 – 15 -0–5 0–5 I. Select Backfill: Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay with plasticity index between 7 and 20 or clayey soils treated with lime in accordance with Division 31 to meet plasticity criteria. J. Random Backfill: Any suitable soil or mixture of soils within Classes I, II, III and IV; or fat clay (CH) where allowed by applicable backfill installation specification. Refer to Division 31. K. Cement Stabilized Sand: Conform to requirements of Division 31. L. Concrete Backfill: Conform to Class B concrete as specified in Division 32. M. Flexible Base Course Material: Conform to requirements of applicable portions of Division 33. MATERIAL TESTING A. Source Qualification. Perform testing to obtain tests by suppliers for selection of material sources and products not from the project site. Test samples of processed materials from current production representing material to be delivered. Use tests to verify that materials meet specification requirements. Repeat qualification test procedures each time source characteristics change or there is planned change in source location or supplier. Include the following qualification tests, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. C. Huckabee Gradation. Report complete sieve analyses regardless of specified control sieves from largest particle through No. 200 sieve. Plasticity of material passing No. 40 sieve. Los Angeles abrasion wear of material retained on No. 4 sieve. Clay lumps. Lightweight pieces. Organic impurities. Production Testing. Provide reports to Owner’s Representative from an independent testing laboratory that backfill materials to be placed in Work meet applicable specification requirements. Assist Owner’s Representative in obtaining material samples for verification testing at source or at production plant. 31 06 20.17 - 6 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas PART 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXECUTION SOURCES A. Use of existing material in trench excavations is acceptable, provided applicable specification requirements are satisfied. B. Identify off-site sources for backfill materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that Owner’s Representative may obtain samples for verification testing. C. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet requirements of specifications will be rejected. Do not use material which, after approval, has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once material is approved by Owner’s Representative, expense for sampling and testing required to change to different material will be credited to Owner through change order. D. Bank run sand, select backfill, and random backfill, if available in project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete work from off-site sources. E. Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. MATERIAL HANDLING A. When backfill material is obtained from either commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open pit to expose vertical faces of various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate selected material by vertical cuts extending through exposed strata to achieve uniformity in product. B. Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling, control, and verification testing by Owner’s Representative in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C. When stockpiling backfill material near project site, use appropriate covers to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering drainage system. D. Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Owner’s Representative may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. c. 2. Huckabee On-site stockpiles. Materials placed in Work. The Owner’s Representative may re-sample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. 31 06 20.17 - 7 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. Production Verification Testing: Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Samples may be taken at source or at production plant, as applicable. END OF SECTION 31 06 20.17 Huckabee 31 06 20.17 - 8 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 31 23 16.14 - TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench Safety System for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench Safety System for structural excavations that fall under provisions of State and Federal trench safety laws. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 1.5 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). The Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. DEFINITIONS A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. B. The Trench Safety System requirements will apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent of a trench as defined. C. Trench Safety Systems include but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit a safety program specifically for the construction of trench excavation. Design the Trench Safety Program to be in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR standards governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations. C. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from OSHA standards or special designs shall be sealed by a licensed Engineer retained and paid by Contractor. D. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under State and Federal trench safety laws. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain Trench Safety Systems in accordance with the detail specifications set out in the provision of Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring, Federal Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, as amended, including Final Rule, published in the Federal Register Vol. 54, No. 209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these specifications by reference include Sections 1926-650 through 1926-652. B. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of OSHA standards included in "Subpart P - Excavations" from the Federal Register Vol. 54, No. 209. Huckabee 31 23 16.14 - 1 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.6 C. Legislation that has been enacted by the Texas Legislature with regard to trench safety systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Refer to Texas Health and Safety Code Ann., § 756.021 (Vernon 1991). D. Reference materials, if developed for a specific project, will be issued with the Bid Documents. INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees and agents, from any and all damages, costs (including, without limitation, legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation), judgements or claims by anyone for injury or death of persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. PART 2 P R O D U C T S – Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain Trench Safety Systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA 29 CFR. B. Install specially designed Trench Safety Systems in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. A competent person, as identified in the Contractor's trench safety program, shall verify that trench boxes and other premanufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. INSPECTION A. Contractor, or Contractor's independently retained consultant, shall make daily inspections of the Trench Safety Systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA 29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, Contractor shall immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken by Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed Trench Safety Systems to each field condition encountered on the project. END OF SECTION 31 23 16.14 Huckabee 31 23 16.14 - 2 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 31 23 33 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Excavation, trenching, foundation, embedment, and backfill for installation of utilities, including manholes and other pipeline structures. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 GENERAL Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. DEFINITIONS A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of bedding as shown on Drawings, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over-excavations. B. Pipe Bedding: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. C. Haunching: Material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to springline of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. D. Initial Backfill: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from springline of pipe (top of haunching) up to level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. E. Pipe Embedment: Portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching and initial backfill. F. Trench Zone: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. G. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Materials that are classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according to ASTM D 2487. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 4 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. H. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification requirements. Materials mixed with lime or cement that can be compacted to required density and meeting requirements for suitable materials may be considered suitable materials, unless otherwise indicated. I. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements placed and compacted under controlled conditions. Huckabee 31 23 33 - 1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas J. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to trench, such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower ground water, intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or bottom of trench excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. Refer to Division 1. K. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering trench shall be controlled and removed as part of excavation drainage. L. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in trench by sump pumping and using drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321, placed on foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. M. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary. 1. 2. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances, such as sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density. N. Sub-trench: Sub-trench is special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by Contractor. O. Trench Dam: Placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along trench. P. Over-excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. Q. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. R. Trench Safety Systems include both protective systems and shoring systems as defined in Division 31. Huckabee 31 23 33 - 2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.4 1.5 S. Trench Shield (Trench Box): Portable worker safety structure moved along trench as work proceeds, used as protective system and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in, thereby protecting persons within trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. T. Shoring System: Structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain stable soil conditions and prevent cave-ins, or to prevent movement of ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. U. Special Shoring: Shoring system meeting special shoring as specified in Paragraph 1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements, for locations identified on Drawings. REFERENCES A. ASTM C 12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. B. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil Cement Mixtures. C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft). D. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by SandCone Method. E. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications. F. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. G. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). H. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). I. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. J. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing. K. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils. L. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). SCHEDULING A. Huckabee Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other structures. 31 23 33 - 3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction including: 1. 2. 3. 1.7 1.8 C. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with requirements of Division 31. D. Submit trench excavation safety program in accordance with requirements of Division 31. Include designs for special shoring meeting requirements defined in Paragraph 1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements contained herein. E. Submit record of location of utilities as installed, referenced to survey control points. Include locations of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give stations, horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts, and gradients. F. Submit 11 inch by 17 inch or 12 inch by 18 inch copy of Drawing with plotted utility or obstruction location titled "Critical Location Report" to Owner’s Representative. TESTS A. Testing and analysis of backfill materials for soil classification and compaction during construction will be performed by an independent laboratory provided by Owner in accordance with requirements of Division 1 and as specified in this Section. B. Perform backfill material source qualification testing in accordance with requirements of Division 31. SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. PART 2 2.1 Trench widths. Procedures for foundation and pipe zone bedding placement, and trench backfill compaction. Procedures for assuring compaction against undisturbed soil when premanufactured trench safety systems are proposed. Have special shoring designed or selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer to provide support for sides of excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. Special shoring may be a premanufactured system selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer to meet project site requirements based on manufacturer's standard design. PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. Huckabee 31 23 33 - 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.2 C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. D. Use special shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting requirements as specified in Paragraph 1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements. MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and product descriptions of Division 31. B. Concrete Backfill: Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Division 31. C. Geotextile (Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Division 1. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed (bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. PART 3 3.1 3.2 EXECUTION STANDARD PRACTICE A. Install flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, to conform to standard practice described in ASTM D 2321, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs. B. Install rigid pipe to conform to standard practice described in ASTM C 12, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs. C. Classification of material will be determined by Owner’s Representative. PREPARATION A. Establish traffic control to conform to requirements of Division 1. Maintain barricades and warning lights for streets and intersections affected by Work, and are considered hazardous to traffic movements. B. Perform work to conform to applicable safety standards and regulations. Employ trench safety system as specified in Division 31. C. Immediately notify agency or company owning any existing utility line which is damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from Owner’s Representative and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. D. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform to requirements of Division 2, as applicable. E. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface-water control measures to conform to Division 1. Provide stable trench to allow installation in accordance with Specifications. Huckabee 31 23 33 - 5 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas F. 3.3 Maintain permanent benchmarks, monumentation, and other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace those which are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Division 1. CRITICAL LOCATION INVESTIGATION A. Horizontal and vertical location of various underground lines shown on Drawings, including but not limited to water lines, gas lines, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, telecommunication lines, electric lines or power ducts, pipelines, concrete and debris, are based on best information available but are only approximate locations. At Critical Locations shown on Drawings, field verify horizontal and vertical locations of such lines within zone 2 feet vertically and 4 feet horizontally of proposed work. 1. 2. 3.4 3.5 Verify location of existing utilities minimum of 7 working days in advance of pipe laying activities based on daily pipe laying rate. Use extreme caution and care when uncovering these lines. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing immediately upon identification of obstruction. In event of failure to identify obstruction in minimum of 7 days, Contractor will not be entitled to extra cost for downtime including, but not limited to, payroll, equipment, overhead, demobilization and remobilization, until 7 days has passed from time Owner’s Representative is notified of obstruction. B. Notify involved utility companies of date and time that investigation excavation will occur and request that their respective utility lines be marked in field. Comply with utility or pipeline company requirements that their representative be present during excavation. Provide Owner’s Representative with 48 hours notice prior to field excavation or related work. C. Survey vertical and horizontal locations of obstructions relative to project baseline and datum and plot on 12 inch by 18 inch copy of Drawings. For large diameter water lines, submit to Owner’s Representative for approval, horizontal and vertical alignment dimensions for connections to existing lines, tied into project baseline, signed and sealed by R.P.L.S. PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects outside of grading limits and within grading limits as designated on Drawings, and in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Protect and support above-grade and below-grade utilities which are to remain. C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on Drawings. D. Take measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in trenches. Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or pavement failures or potholes occur, repair, recompact, and pave those areas at no additional cost to the Owner. EXCAVATION A. Huckabee Except as otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. 31 23 33 - 6 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter (O.D.). Nominal Pipe Size, Inches Minimum Trench Width, Inches Less than 18 O.D. + 24 18 to 30 O.D. + 24 36 to 42 O.D. + 36 Greater than 42 O.D. + 48 D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify Owner’s Representative and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G. Huckabee Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with trench excavation, so that soils within full height of trench excavation walls will remain laterally supported at all times. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in pipe embedment zone throughout installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing trench wall soil out from behind trench wall support. Leave sheeting driven into or below pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation and embedment materials, unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Representative. Leave rangers, walers, and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting, which has been cut off, and trench wall in vicinity of pipe zone. Employ special methods for maintaining integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports, place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of pipe embedment zone, do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into embedment zone shall be equivalent of 1-inch-thick steel plate. As sheeting is removed, fill in voids left with grouting material. Use of Trench Shields. When trench shield (trench box) is used as worker safety device, the following requirements apply: 31 23 33 - 7 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.6 3.7 Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely, without damage to trench sidewalls. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor degree of compaction reduced. Recompact after shield is moved if soil is disturbed. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath shield. For backfill above bedding, lift shield as each layer of backfill is placed and spread. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in safe manner. Conform to applicable Government regulations. H. Voids under or damages to paving area outside shield caused by Contractor's work will require removal of pavement, consolidation and replacement of pavement in accordance with Contract Documents. Repair damage resulting from failure to provide adequate supports. Contractor is responsible for all cost associated with the repairs. I. Place sand or soil behind shoring or trench shield to prevent soil outside shoring from collapsing and causing voids under pavement. Immediately pack suitable material in outside voids following excavation to avoid caving of trench walls. J. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of pipeline with company's representative. Support pipeline with methods agreed to by pipeline company's representative. Use small, rubbertired excavator, such as backhoe, to do exploratory excavation. Bucket that is used to dig in close proximity to pipelines shall not have teeth or shall have guard installed over teeth to approximate bucket without teeth. Excavate by hand within 1 foot of Pipeline Company’s line. Do not use larger excavation equipment than normally used to dig trench in vicinity of pipeline until pipelines have been uncovered and fully exposed. Do not place large excavation and hauling equipment directly over pipelines unless approved by Pipeline Company’s representative. K. When, during excavation to uncover pipeline company's pipelines, screwed collar or an oxy­acetylene weld is exposed, immediately notify Owner’s Representative. Provide supports for collar or welds. Discuss with Pipeline Company’s representative and determine methods of supporting collar or weld during excavation and later backfilling operations. When collar is exposed, request Pipeline Company to provide welder in a timely manner to weld ends of collar prior to backfilling of excavation. HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Use only excavated materials, which are suitable as defined in this Section and conforming to Division 31. Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at distance from trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. B. When required, provide additional backfill material conforming to requirements of Division 31. C. Do not place stockpiles of excess excavated materials on streets and adjacent properties. Protect backfill material to be used on site. Maintain site conditions in accordance with Division 1. Excavate trench so that pipe is centered in trench. Do not obstruct sight distance for vehicles utilizing roadway or detours with stockpiled materials. TRENCH FOUNDATION Huckabee 31 23 33 - 8 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. When wet soil is encountered on trench bottom and dewatering system is not required, overexcavate an additional 6 inches with approval by Owner’s Representative. Place nonwoven geotextile fabric and then compact 12 inches of crushed stone in one lift on top of fabric. Compact crushed stone with four passes of vibratory-type compaction equipment. C. Perform over excavation, if directed by Owner’s Representative, in accordance with Paragraph 3.07B above. Removal of unstable or unsuitable material may be required if approved by Owner’s Representative: 1. 2. D. 3.8 Even though Contractor has not determined material to be unsuitable, or If unstable trench bottom is encountered and an adequate ground water control system is installed and operating according to Division 1. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION A. Remove loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil from bottoms and sidewalls of trenches immediately prior to placement of embedment materials. B. Place embedment including bedding, haunching, and initial backfill as shown on Drawings. C. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Protect flexible pipe from damage during placing of pipe zone bedding material. Perform placement and compaction directly against undisturbed soils in trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. D. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of embedment zone unless means to maintain density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of material against undisturbed soil. E. Place geotextile to prevent particle migration from in-situ soil into open-graded (Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers. F. G. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. Place haunching material manually around pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit, if used, directly on foundation without bedding. I. Shovel in-place and compact embedment material using pneumatic tampers in restricted areas, and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted areas. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of next lift. Water tamping is not allowed. Huckabee 31 23 33 - 9 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas J. For water lines construction embedment, use bank run sand, concrete sand, gem sand, pea gravel, or crushed limestone as specified in Division 31. For water lines adhere to the following subparagraph numbers 1 and 2; for utility installation other than water, adhere to numbers 3 and 4 below: 1. 2. 3. 4. K. 3.9 Class I, II and III Embedment Materials: a. Maximum 6 inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compact to achieve minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content to be within -3 percent to +5 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. Cement Stabilized Sand (where required for special installations): a. Maximum 6 inches compacted thickness. b. Compact to achieve minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content to be on dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698 but sufficient for effective hydration. Class I Embedment Materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed pipe to meet deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening soil of trench bottom, foundation or trench walls. Class II Embedment and Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. Place trench dams in Class I embedment in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. B. For water lines, backfill in trench zone, including auger pits, intermediate and site pits, with bank run sand, select fill, or random backfill material as specified in Division 31. C. For sewer pipes, use backfill materials described by trench limits. For "trench zone backfill" under pavement and to within one foot back of curb, use cement stabilized sand to level 12 inches below the pavement. For sewer pipes under natural ground backfill from 12 inches Huckabee 31 23 33 - 10 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas above top of pipe to 6” inches below finish grade with suitable on-site material or select backfill. Use select backfill for rigid pavements or flexible base material for asphalt pavements for 12- inch backfill directly under pavement. Use topsoil for 6-inch backfill directly under natural grade. For backfill materials reference Division 31. D. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above crown of pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from ground surface. E. When shown on Drawings, random backfill of suitable material may be used in trench zone for trench excavations outside pavements. F. Place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact. Fully compact each lift before placement of next lift. 1. Class I, II, III or IV or combination thereof (Random Backfill): a. b. c. 2. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. Compact by vibratory equipment to minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content within zero percent to +5 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. Cement-Stabilized Sand: Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction, but do not exceed 12 inches. b. Compact by vibratory equipment to minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. Select Backfill: a. Place in maximum 8-inch loose layers. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent below or 5 percent above optimum determined according to ASTM D 698, unless approved by Owner’s Representative. a. 3. G. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for trench excavations not under pavement, random backfill of suitable material may be used in trench zone. 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Huckabee Fat clays (CH) may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at Contractor's option. When required density is not achieved, at no additional cost to Owner, rework, dry out, use lime stabilization or other approved methods to achieve compaction requirements, or use different suitable material. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12-inch lift thickness for granular soils. Compact to minimum of 90 percent of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. For electric conduits, remove form work used for construction of conduits before placing trench zone backfill. 31 23 33 - 11 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.10 MANHOLES, INLETS, JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on Drawings. B. Below paved areas, encapsulate structure with cement stabilized sand; minimum of 1 foot below base, minimum 2 foot around walls, up to within 12 inches of pavement subgrade. Compact in accordance with Paragraph 3.9.F.2 of this Section. Use select backfill for rigid pavements or flexible base material for asphalt pavements for 12- inch backfill directly under pavement. C. In unpaved areas, encapsulate structure with cement stabilized sand; minimum of 1 foot below base, minimum 2 foot around walls, up to within 12 inches of finish grade. Compact in accordance with Paragraph 3.9.F.2 of this Section. Use suitable on-site material and topsoil for the 12-inch backfill directly under natural ground. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. Test for material source qualifications as defined in Division 1. B. Provide excavation and trench safety systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction at no additional cost to Owner. C. Tests will be performed on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity, or when requested by Owner’s Representative. D. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698, and for cement- stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Perform additional moisture-density relationship tests once a month or whenever there is noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. E. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at following frequencies and conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Huckabee For open cut construction projects and auger pits: Unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative, successful compaction to be measured by one test per 40 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and two tests per 40 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Length of auger pits to be measured to arrive at 40 linear feet. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work. Density tests will be distributed among placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. Density tests may be performed at various depths below fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 31 23 33 - 12 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 6. 7. 8. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. Recompacted placement will be retested at same frequency as first test series, including verification tests. Identify elevation of test with respect to natural ground or pavement. F. Recondition, recompact, and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For hardened soil cement with nonconforming density, core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. G. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.12 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Division 1. END OF SECTION 31 23 33 Huckabee 31 23 33 - 13 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 31 23 33 - 14 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 32 91 13.13 – TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting in areas other than designated athletic fields. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. PART 2 2.1 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. PRODUCTS TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, weeds, non-soil materials, and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots, stumps, and stones larger than 2 inches. C. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained areas where topsoil occurs at minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. PART 3 3.1 3.2 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. Stockpile in area approved by Owner’s Representative. B. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Cover to protect from erosion. TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. 3.3 pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5 Liquid limit: 50 or less Plasticity index: 20 or less Gradation: maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve Conform to excavation and stockpiling requirements of Division 31. PLACEMENT A. Huckabee Place no topsoil until subgrade has been approved. For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing material to minimum depth of 4 inches, or as indicated on Drawings. Remove vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on loosened material and roll lightly with appropriate lawn roller to consolidate topsoil. 32 91 13.13- 1 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.4 B. Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over sand bedding and backfill materials specified in Division 31. C. For areas to receive shrubs or trees, excavate existing material and place topsoil to depth and dimensions shown on Drawings. D. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Division 1. E. Place topsoil to promote good drainage and compact with light roller. Water topsoil after placement until saturated for minimum depth 6 inches, fill in and recompact areas of settlement. PROTECTION A. Protect topsoil from wind and water erosion until planting is completed. END OF SECTION 32 91 13.13 Huckabee 32 91 13.13- 2 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 32 92 13 – HYDRO-MULCHING PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintenance in areas other than designated athletic fields. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specifications and requirements of Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C. Submit certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specifications and requirements of Texas Fertilizer Law. PART 2 2.1 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Division 32. B. Seed: Conform to U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of Federal Seed Act and Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis, name of vendor, and germination test results. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. Seed requirements, application rates, and planting dates are: TYPE Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 Annual Rye Grass (Gulf) Huckabee APPLICATION RATE POUNDS/A 40 40 40 40 40 30 PLANTING DATE Jan 1 to Mar 31 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Oct 1 to Dec 31 32 92 13 - 1 HYDRO-MULCHING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas C. Fertilizer: Dry and free flowing, inorganic, water soluble commercial fertilizer, which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged, or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of following elements: 1. 2. 3. D. Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent Mulch: 1. 2. 3. Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches in length and 0.01 inches in diameter. Cellulose fibers manufactured from recycled newspaper and meeting same fiber content and size as for cellulose fibers from wood chips. Dye mulch green for coverage verification purposes. E. Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack 1" or approved equal. F. Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, such as "Benefin," or approved equal. PART 3 E X E C U T I O N 3.1 3.2 3.3 PREPARATION A. Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Division 32. B. Dispose of Objectionable and Waste Materials in accordance with Division 1. APPLICATION A. Seed: Apply uniformly at rates given in Paragraph 2.01 B for type of seed and planting date. B. Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at rate of 500 pounds per acre. C. Mulch: Apply uniformly at rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet. D. Soil Stabilizer: Apply uniformly at rate of 40 pounds per acre. E. Weed Control Agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to hydro mulching. F. Sod: Lay single row of sod along perimeter where top soil and pavement intersect. Apply in conformance to Division 32. G. Suspend operations under conditions of drought, excessive moisture, high winds, or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain Owner’s Representative approval before resuming operations. MAINTENANCE A. Maintain grassed areas minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. For areas seeded in fall, continue maintenance following spring until acceptable lawn is established. B. Maintain grassed areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, and trimming. Huckabee 32 92 13 - 2 HYDRO-MULCHING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas C. Repair areas damaged by erosion by regrading, rolling and replanting. D. Reseed small, sparse grass areas. When sparse areas exceed 20 percent of planted area, reseed by hydro mulch. E. Mow grass when height reaches 3 1/2 inches or greater on average before final acceptance. Mow to height of 2 1/2 inches. END OF SECTION 32 92 13 Huckabee 32 92 13 - 3 HYDRO-MULCHING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 32 92 13 - 4 HYDRO-MULCHING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 32 92 23 - SODDING PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Restoration of existing lawn areas disturbed by construction shall be by installation of new sod in areas other than designated athletic fields. B. Planting of sod within areas designated on Drawings for purpose of surface stabilization, channel stabilization or vegetation buffer strips. C. Sod is defined as blocks, squares, strips of turfgrass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. To be placed edge to edge for complete coverage. D. Lawn is defined as ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Conform to requirements of Division 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sod only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Owner’s Representative to be suitable for proper placement. B. Water and fertilize new sod. C. Guarantee sod to be growing 30 days after substantial completion. D. Maintenance Period: 1. 2. 3. E. PART 2 2.1 Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for 30 day period from date of substantial completion. Resod unacceptable areas. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. Install disease control within guidelines set forth by Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. Notify Owner’s Representative 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. PRODUCTS SOD A. Huckabee Species: Common Bermuda. 32 92 23 - 1 SODDING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.2 B. Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C. Size: 12 inch wide strips, uniformly 2 inches thick with clean-cut edges. D. Sod is to be supplied and maintained in healthy condition as evidenced by grass being normal green color. FERTILIZER A. 2.3 Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. WEED AND INSECT TREATMENT A. 2.4 Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to Owner’s Representative for approval. Install insect and disease control within guidelines set forth by Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. WATER A. 2.5 Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Contractor may use public water when water use is measured through Contractor's meter. Do not use private resident's water. BANK SAND A. PART 3 3.1 3.2 Free of clay lumps, roots, grass, salt or other foreign material. EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Verify that soil placement and compaction have been satisfactorily completed. Verify that soil is within allowable range of moisture content. B. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. D. Rake areas to be sodded smooth, free from unsightly variations, bumps, ridges or depressions. E. Spread 2 inch layer of bank sand over areas to be sodded prior to planting of sod. F. Apply fertilizer at rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. APPLICATION A. Huckabee Full Sodding: Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. 32 92 23 - 2 SODDING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 B. On slopes 2:1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod. C. Prior to placing sod, on slopes 3:1 or where indicated, place Hold/Gro or Roll Lite or equal over topsoil. Securely anchor in place with posts sunk firmly into ground at maximum 16 feet on center along pitch of slope and equal to width of wire mesh horizontally across slopes. D. After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. E. Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to Owner’s Representative for approval, prior to construction. MAINTENANCE A. Watering: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Mowing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 2. 3. 4. Huckabee Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3 1/2 inches. Set mower blades at 2 1/2 inches. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. Mow sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation with light-weight rotary type mower. Mow sod only when dry and not in saturated or soft condition. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. D. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for first 3 weeks after area is sodded. After 3 week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. Water in afternoon or at night to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at rate of 40 pounds per 5000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Do not place fertilizer until 2 weeks after placement of sod. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. Restrict all traffic from sodded areas until sod is established or for minimum 10 days during growing season. Use wood lath and plastic tape to cordon sodded areas. Maintain tape and lath throughout for minimum 30 days during growing season. 32 92 23 - 3 SODDING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.4 CLEANUP A. During course of planting, remove excess and waste materials; keep lawn areas clean and take precautions to avoid damage to existing structures, plants, grass, and streets. B. Remove barriers, signs, and other Contractor material and equipment from project site at termination of establishment period. C. Dispose of unused materials and rubbish in accordance with Division 1. END OF SECTION 32 92 23 Huckabee 32 92 23 - 4 SODDING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 06 10.14 - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution, in nominal diameters 4 inches through 20 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 20 inches. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. B. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. C. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. D. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). E. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. F. ASTM D 2444 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight). G. ASTM D 2680 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. H. ASTM D 3034 - Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. I. ASTM D 3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. J. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. K. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.4 1.5 L. ASTM F 679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. M. ASTM F 794 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. N. ASTM F 949 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with Smooth Interior and Fittings. O. AWWA C 110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inches Through 48 Inches for Water. P. AWWA C 111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. Q. AWWA C 900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches for Water Distribution. R. AWWA C 905 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 In. Through 48 In., for Water Transmission and Distribution. S. AWWA C 909 - Standard for Molecularly-Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches through 12 Inches (100mm through 300 mm), for Water Distribution. T. PPI TR3 - Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials. U. UNI-B-13 - Recommended Standard Performance Specification for Joint Restraint Devices for Use with Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C 900, AWWA C 909 and AWWA C 905 for pressure pipe applications, or appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe for water lines and force mains has been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C 900, AWWA C 909 and AWWA C 905, and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to Owner’s Representative for review. Cost of testing paid by Contractor. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIAL Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas A. Use PVC compounds in manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout, free of voids, cracks, inclusions, and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. PVC Restrained Pipe: Must be listed on City’s current Product Approval List. 1. D. Water Service. 1. 2. E. Provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters' Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. Bear National Sanitation Foundation Seal of Approval (NSF-PW). Gaskets: 1. 2. 3. 2.2 Pipe Material: a. DR 18: For restrained joints where shown on Drawings. b. DR 14: For alternate to offset pipe sections shown on Drawings. Do not use PVC for offset sections with depth of cover greater than 20 feet or less than 4 feet. Do not use PVC in potentially petroleum contaminated areas. Gaskets shall meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory-installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faces 1/8-inch-thick ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber. Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch ethylene propylene (EDR) rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect flange from bolting moment. F. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic, non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. G. Do not use PVC in potentially or known contaminated areas. H. Do not use PVC in areas exposed to direct sunlight. WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4 inch through 12 inch: AWWA C 900, AWWA C 909, Class 150, DR 18; AWWA C 900, Class 200, DR 14 as alternate to offset pipe sections; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast-iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 14 inch through 20 inch: AWWA C 905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast-iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Provide Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe from approved manufacturers. Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 3 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.3 D. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by Owner’s Representative. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C 900, AWWA C 905, AWWA C 909, ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe and storm sewer pipe shall be in accordance with provisions in following table: Wall Construction Manufacturer Solid J-M Pipe Certain Teed Diamond Uponor ETI North American Truss (Gasketed) Profile Contech Contech A-2000 Contech A-2026 ETI, Ultra-Rib ETI, Ultra-Corr ASTM Designation SDR (Max.)/ Stiffness (Min.) D3034 D3034 F679 AWWA C900 AWWA C909 AWWAC905 D2680 F949 F949 SDR 26 / PS 115 SDR 35 / PS 46 SDR 35 / PS 46 DR 18 / N/A DR 18 / N/A DR 18 / N/A N/A / 200 psi N/A / 46 psi N/A / 115 psi Diameter Size Range 6” to 10” 12” & 15” 18” to 27” 4” to 12” 4” to 12” 14” to 16” 8” to 15” 12” to 36” 8” to 10” F794 F794 N/A / 46 psi N/A / 46 psi 8” to 30” 24” to 36” B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F 679, except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch diameter crossing over water lines, or crossing under water lines with less than 2-feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastomeric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477, or ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477. Gaskets shall be factory-assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. Manufacturer shall test sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. E. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. F. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval by Owner’s Representative. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. G. Pipe Stiffness. Determine pipe stiffness at 5 percent deflection in accordance with Test Method D 2412. Minimum pipe stiffness shall be 46 psi. For diameters 4 inches through 18 inches, test three specimens, each a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) in length. For Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas diameters 21 inch through 36 inch, test three specimens, each a minimum of 12 inch (305 mm) in length. Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.4 H. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.04F, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 60 percent of original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform. Test specimens, when examined under normal light and with unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or bracing profiles. Perform the flattening test in conjunction with pipe stiffness test. I. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except that joint shall remain watertight at minimum deflection of 5 percent. Manufacturer will be required to provide independent third party certification for joint testing each diameter of storm sewer pipe. J. Purpose of Tests. Flattening and pipe stiffness tests are intended to be routine quality control tests. Joint tightness test is intended to qualify pipe to specified level of performance. SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide approved PVC pressure pipe conforming to requirements for water service pipe, and conforming to minimum working pressure rating specified in Division 33. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot, containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use approved joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13, for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less. C. Fittings: Provide approved ductile iron fittings as per Division 33, except furnish fittings with one of following approved internal linings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.5 Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248, heat fused to interior surface of fitting Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) polyurethane Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) ceramic epoxy Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) fusion bonded epoxy D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile-iron fittings as required by Division 33. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with Paragraph 2.02E. BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A 21.10 or ANSI A 21.53, ductile iron; ANSI A 21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. Approved restrained joints, 250 200 psi, may be provided for up to 12 inches in diameter (water or sanitary). B. Provide approved restrained joint fittings: Integral restrained joint fittings and pipe do not require secondary restraint. C. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION PROTECTION Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 6 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas A. 3.2 Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Division 33, as applicable. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Division 33, ASTM D 2321 for Sewer Pipe, and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install PVC water service pipe to clear utility lines and have minimum depth of cover below property line grade of street, unless otherwise required by Drawings: 1. 2. 3.3 Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller 4 feet of cover. Water service pipe 16 inches in diameter and larger 5 feet of cover. D. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle pipe when lowering pipe into trench. E. Hand shovel pipe bedding under pipe haunches and along sides of pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. F. Store PVC pipe under cover out of direct sunlight. Protect pipe from excessive heat or harmful chemicals. Prevent damage by crushing or piercing. G. Allow PVC pipe to cool to ground temperature before backfilling when assembled out of trench to prevent pullout due to thermal contraction. PVC RESTRAINED MECHANISM A. Do not apply lubricant to spline or pipe or coupling spline grooves. B. Do not use excessive force while inserting the spline through coupling. C. Insert spline until it is fully seated around circumference of pipe. D. Field Cutting of Pipe Ends: 1. 2. 3. Perform by workers certified by manufacturer. Use a PVC pipe cutter and provide square ends. Use manufacturer approved power routing and grooving tool to field fabricate required pipe groove. END OF SECTION 33 06 10.14 Huckabee 33 06 10.14 - 7 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 06 10.15 – DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 G E N E R A L 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains, wastewater force mains, gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104) - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings, for Water and Other Liquids. B. ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110) - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-in. through 48-in., for Water and Other Liquids. C. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111) - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. D. ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C 115) - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. E. ANSI A 21.50 ( AWWA C 150) - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. F. ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151) - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water and Other Liquids. G. ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C 153) - Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inches through 24 inches and 54 inches through 64 inches for water service. H. ANSI B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. I. ASTM D 1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. J. ASTM G 62 - Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings. K. AWWA C 600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. L. SSPC-SP 6 - Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit shop drawings showing design of pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by Engineer is at Contractor's risk. Huckabee 33 06 10.15 - 1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.11. PART 2 P R O D U C T S 2.1 2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe Barrels: ANSI A 21.15, ANSI A 21.50 or ANSI A 21.51; bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval; minimum thickness Class 51 for water mains and Class 52 for sanitary sewers, or as shown on Drawings. Provide minimum thickness Class 53 for flanged pipe. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths, not less than 18 feet long, except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on shop drawings. JOINTS A. Joint Types: ANSI A 21.11 push-on; ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint; or ANSI A 21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or required by these specifications. For bolted joints, bolts shall conform to requirements of AWWA C 111. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Drawings, provide one of the following, or equal: 1. 2. 3. 2.3 Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. C. Threaded- or grooved-type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 33 13 00.10 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines as applicable. E. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion, bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Drawings to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Drawings. GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber (SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch-thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A 21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: Huckabee 33 06 10.15 - 2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas Contaminant 2.4 2.5 Gasket Material Required Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings: ANSI A 21.10; ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets, and lubricants; pressure rated at 250 psig. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A 21.10; ANSI B 16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 110); pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains: ANSI A 21.53; 4-inch through 12-inch diameter; cement-mortar lining; conform to requirements Division 33 - Polyethylene Wrap. COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: 1. 2. 3. 4. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. Liner thickness: Nominal 40 mils, minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6 to 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. b. c. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings; APolyline@ by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or equal. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner, provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, provide pipe as specified in Paragraph 2.05B, Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors. D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A 21.10, ANSI A 21.15, or ANSI A 21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide polyethylene wrap for buried ductile iron pipe, including polyurethane coated pipe. Conform to requirements of Division 33 - Polyethylene Wrap. Huckabee 33 06 10.15 - 3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.6 F. For flanged joints in buried service, provide petrolatum wrapping system, Denso, or equal, for the complete joint and alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 stainless steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants identified in the Phase II Environmental Site Assessment Report. MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron pipe are American Cast Iron Pipe Co., McWayne Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. PART 3 E X E C U T I O N 3.1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Sections 33 11 00 - Water Utility Distribution Piping, and 33 31 00 – Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping, except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C 600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: Diameter (Inches) 16 and 24 12 and smaller Depth of Cover (Feet) 5 4 END OF SECTION 33 06 10.15 Huckabee 33 06 10.15 - 4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 06 40.10 - HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for gravity sewers and drains, including fittings. B. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for sanitary sewer force mains, including fittings. C. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for storm sewers culverts. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe, 18"48" diameter. B. AASHTO Section 18 - Soil Thermoplastic Pipe Interaction Systems. C. AASHTO Section 30 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewer and Other Gravity Flow Applications. D. ASTM D 618 - Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing. E. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. F. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Pipe. G. ASTM D 2657 - Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings. H. ASTM D 2837 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials. I. ASTM D 3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. J. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. K. ASTM D 3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials. L. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. M. ASTM F 714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic (PE) Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. N. ASTM F 894 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large-Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe. Huckabee 33 06 40.10 - 1 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1.4 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings showing design of pipe and fittings, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certificate of conformance to Specifications. B. Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. C. Owner’s Representative reserves right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Inspection shall in no way relieve manufacturer of responsibilities to provide products that comply with applicable standards and these Specifications. 1. Manufacturer's Notification: Should Owner’s Representative wish to witness manufacture of specific pipes, manufacturer shall provide Owner’s Representative with minimum three weeks notice of when and where production of those specific pipes will take place. Failure to Inspect. Approval of products or tests is not implied by Owner’s Representative's decision not to inspect manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes. 2. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. PART 2 2.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with documented experience of minimum 5 years of pipe installations that have been in successful, continuous service for same type of service as proposed Work. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. For sanitary sewer pipe provide HDPE pipe as follows: 1. New construction pipe products gravity sanitary sewer direct bury. INSTALLATION SPEC NO. GENERIC NAME 02505 Solid Wall Polyethylene (HDPE) 02531 Polyethylene Profile Wall Huckabee ASTM or AASHTO SDR (NUMERIC MAXIMUM) PIPE STIFFNESS (NUMERIC MINIMUM) SIZE RANGE Chevron Plexco Phillip 66 Quail Poly Pipe ASTM F-714 DR 17 DR 21 115 46 8” – 10” 12” – 48” Spirolite ASTM F-894 n/a 46 18”–120” TRADE NAME OR MANUFACTURER 33 06 40.10 - 2 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2. INSTALLATION SPEC NO. REHABILITATION CONSTRUCTION PIPE PRODUCTS SLIPLINING OF SANITARY SEWER GENERIC NAME TRADE NAME OR MANUFACTURER 02550 Solid Wall Poly Chevron Plexco Quail Poly Pipe AmeriFlow by NAPCO Ameriflow by KWH 02550 Polyethylene Profile Wall Spirolite B. ASTM SDR (NUMERIC MAXIMUM) PIPE STIFFNESS (NUMERIC MINIMUM) SIZE RANGE F714 DR 21 46 8” – 48” 3” – 12” 14” – 63” F-894 n/a 46 18”–120” For Storm Sewer and Residential Driveway Culverts provide HDPE as follows: 1. 2. N-12 and N-12 HC by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. (ADS). Sure-Lok F477 by Hancor, Inc. C. Furnish solid wall pipe with plain end construction for heat joining (butt fusion) conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for joining to produce fused leak-free joint. D. Furnish profile-wall gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot end construction conforming to ASTM D 3212. Joining will be accomplished with elastomeric gasket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use integral bell-and-spigot gasketed joint designed so that when assembled, elastomeric gasket, contained in machined groove on pipe spigot, is compressed radially in pipe bell to form positive seal. Design joint to avoid displacement of gasket when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Furnish solid wall pipe for sanitary sewer force mains with minimum working pressure rating of 150 psi, and with inside diameter equal to or greater than nominal pipe size indicated on Drawings. F. Furnish corrugated polyethylene pipe (CPP) for gravity storm sewer pipe. Joints shall be installed such that connection of pipe sections will form continuous line free from irregularities in flow line. Suitable joints are: 1. G. Jointing: 1. Huckabee Integral Bell and Spigot. Bell shall overlap minimum of two corrugations of spigot end when fully engaged conforming to the requirements of ASTM F-477. Gaskets: a. Meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into circular form or extruded to proper section and then spliced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. Basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or blend of both. b. Pipes allowed to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, where free product is found near elevation of proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for noted contaminants: 33 06 40.10 - 3 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas Contaminant 2. 2.2 2.3 Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by pipe manufacturer Lubricant. Use lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no detrimental effect on gasket or on pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. MATERIALS FOR SANITARY SEWER A. Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting requirements of Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, as defined in ASTM D 1248. Material meeting requirements of cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 3350 are also suitable for making pipe products under these specifications. B. Other Pipe Materials: Materials other than those specified in Paragraph 2.02A, Pipe and Fittings, may be used as part of profile construction, e.g., as core tube to support shape of profile during processing, provided that these materials are compatible with base polyethylene material and are completely encapsulated in finished product and in no way compromise performance of pipe products in intended use. Examples of suitable material include polyethylene and polypropylene. MATERIALS FOR STORM SEWERS AND RESIDENTIAL DRIVEWAY CULVERTS A. Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene HDPE virgin compound material meeting requirements of cell class outlined in AASHTO M 294, AASHTO MP7 and ASTM D 3350. B. Types: CPP shall meet one or both of following: 1. 2. C. 2.4 Gasket Material Required Type S: Outer corrugated wall with smooth inner liner. Type D: Inner and outer smooth walls braced circumferentially or spirally with projections or ribs. Lubricant: Use lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints, which has no detrimental effect on gasket or on pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. TEST METHODS FOR SANITARY SEWER A. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval by Owner’s Representative. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. B. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.05A, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2 inches per minute. Test specimens, when examined under normal light and with unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or bracing profiles. C. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except replace shear load transfer bars and supports with 6-inch-wide support blocks that can be either flat or contoured to conform to pipe's outer contour. Huckabee 33 06 40.10 - 4 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas D. 2.5 2.6 Purpose of Tests. Flattening and joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance. TEST METHODS FOR STOMR SEWERS AND RESDENTIAL DRIVEWAY CULVERTS A. Pipe stiffness at 5 percent deflection, when determined in accordance with ASTM D 2412, shall be as specified in Section 7.4 of AASHTO M 294. B. Minimum inner wall thickness shall be as specified in Section 7.2.2 of AASHTO M 294. MARKING A. Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these Specifications with following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. PART 3 3.1 Pipe size. Pipe class. Production code. Material designation. EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Division 33. B. Install pipe in accordance with the manufacturers recommended installation procedures. C. HDPE pipe is not approved in applications requiring augering of pipe. D. Bedding and backfill: Conform to requirements of Division 31. END OF SECTION 33 06 40.10 Huckabee 33 06 40.10 - 5 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 33 06 40.10 - 6 HDPE SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 11 00 - WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water lines. B. Specifications identify requirements for both small diameter water lines and large diameter water lines. When specifications for large diameter water lines differ from those for small diameter water lines, large diameter specifications will govern for large diameter pipe. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.11/AWWA C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile - Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings B. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System -Health Components C. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings E. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings F. ASTM B 21 - Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes G. ASTM B 98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes H. ASTM B 301 - Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Copper Rod and Bar I. ASTM B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for General Application. J. ASTM E 165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination K. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination L. ASTM F 1674 - Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe M. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe N. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 Inches through 144 Inches SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 1 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. Conform to submittal requirements of applicable Section for type of pipe used. C. Photographs: Submit photographs conforming to requirements of Division 1 prior to commencement of construction. D. Submit videotapes conforming to requirements of Division 1, if applicable. E. Submit Lone Star notification transmittal number prior to beginning excavation. F. Submit, a minimum of 15 days before beginning pipe laying operations, layout drawing identifying proposed sections for disinfecting, hydrostatic testing and site restoration for entire project for review and approval. Layout drawing to identify sequence of sections for: 1. 2. 3. PART 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 Disinfection; not to exceed 4,000 linear feet per section. Hydrostatic testing and transfer of services; to immediately follow sequence of disinfected section. Site restoration; not to exceed limits specified; Sequence in order of disturbance. PRODUCTS PIPE MATERIALS A. Install pipe materials which conform to Division 33. B. Conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and have certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. C. Type of pipe materials used is Contractor's option unless specifically identified on Drawings. D. Provide minimum of 3/8 inch inside joint recess between ends of pipe in straight pipe sections. WELDED JOINT PROTECTION FITTING FOR SMALL DIAMETER STEEL PIPE A. Cylindrical Corrosion Barrier: Provide approved cylindrical corrosion barrier. B. O-rings: Conform to National Sanitary Foundation requirements. RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: See Division 33. B. PVC Pipe: See Division 33. Perform hydrostatic testing in accordance with ASTM F 1674. C. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar-Wrapped Pipe and Steel Pipe: Welded joints (see Paragraph 3.06 D). D. Restrained Joints where required on DIP and PVC pipe: 1. Restraint devices: Manufacture of high strength ductile iron, ASTM A 536 up to 24 inches, and ASTM A 36 for sizes greater than 30 inches. Working pressure rating twice that of design test pressure. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 2 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2. 2.4 COUPLINGS AND APPURTENANCES FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATERLINE A. Flexible (Dresser-type) Couplings. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. PART 3 Install where shown on Drawings or where allowed by Owner’s Representative for Contractor's convenience. Use galvanized flexible couplings when installed on galvanized pipe which is cement lined, or when underground. Provide gaskets manufactured from Neoprene or Buna-N. For steel pipe; provide approved sleeve-type flexible couplings. Thickness of middle ring equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall. Provide approved flanged adapter couplings for steel pipe. Use Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers where flexible couplings are installed underground. Coat entire coupling with 20-mil of approved coal tar coating. Flap Valves: Provide approved flap valves on discharge of manhole drainline as shown on Drawings. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.1 Bolts and connecting hardware: High strength low alloy material in accordance with ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. Body and Flap: ASTM A 126-B cast iron. Seats: ASTM B 21-CA482 or ASTM B 301-CA145 bronze. Resilient Seat Hinge Arms: ASTM B 584-CA865 high tensile bronze. Hinge pins: ASTM B 98-CA655 silicon bronze. EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipe used. B. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. C. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings. D. Confirm that nine feet minimum separation from gravity sanitary sewers and manholes or separation of four feet minimum from force mains as specified in this Section in all directions unless special design is provided on Drawings. E. Where above clearances cannot be attained, and special design has not been provided on Drawings, obtain direction from Owner’s Representative before proceeding with construction. F. Inform Owner’s Representative if unmetered sprinkler or fire line connections exist which are not shown on Drawings. Make transfer only after approval by Owner’s Representative. G. For projects involving multiple subdivisions or locations, limit water line installation to maximum of two project site locations. Maximizing 2 pipe installation crews shall be permitted, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. H. Only the appropriate governing agency will handle operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections and for chlorination. Contractor is responsible for handling necessary installations and removal of chlorination and testing taps and risers. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 3 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.2 I. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outlined in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them "mandatory practices" for this Project. J. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. K. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and, therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. L. Do not remove plugs or clamps during months of peak water demands; June, July and August, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. HANDLING, CLEANING AND INSPECTION A. Handling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe, lining and coating. Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, leather, nylon, or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe, protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material. Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe and PCCP, permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches, measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 4 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 3.4 B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed. Do not place debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. C. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. EARTHWORK A. Conform to applicable provisions of Division 31. B. Bedding: Use bedding materials in conformance with Division 31. C. Backfill: Use bank run sand or earth or native soil as specified in Division 31. Backfill excavated areas in same day excavated. When not possible, cover excavated areas using steel plates on paved areas and other protective measures elsewhere. D. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum loose thickness and wet or dry material to approximately optimum moisture content. Compact to prescribed density Water tamping is not allowed. E. Pipe Embedment: Including 6-inch pipe bedding and backfill to 12 inches above top of pipe. PIPE CUTTING A. 3.5 Cut pipe 12 inches and smaller with standard wheel pipe cutters. Cut pipe larger than 12 inches in manner approved by Owner’s Representative. Make cuts smooth and at right angles to axis of pipe. Bevel plain end with heavy file or grinder to remove sharp edges. PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Lay pipe in subgrade free of water. Make adjustments of pipe to line and grade by scraping away subgrade or filling in with granular material. Properly form bedding to fully support bell without wedging or blocking up bell. Open Cut Construction: Keep pipe trenches free of water which might impair pipe laying operations. Grade pipe to provide uniform support along bottom of pipe. Excavate for bell holes after bottom has been graded and in advance of placing pipe. Lay not more than nominal city block length of not more than 300 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. Cover or backfill laid pipe if pipe laying operations are interrupted and during non-working hours. Place backfill carefully and simultaneously on each side of pipe to avoid lateral displacement of pipe and damage to joints. If adjustment of pipe is required after it has been laid, remove and re-lay as new pipe. B. Install pipe continuously and uninterrupted along each street on which work is to be performed. Obtain approval of Owner’s Representative prior to skipping any portion of Work. C. Protection of Pipeline: Securely place stoppers or bulkheads in openings and in end of line when construction is stopped temporarily and at end of each day's work. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 5 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas D. Perform Critical Location as shown on Drawings. Refer to Division 33 for additional requirements at critical locations. E. Laying Large Diameter Water Line 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. Lay not more than 50 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. Dig trench proper width as shown. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding, as determined by Owner’s Representative. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment; employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as-built" horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. Before assembling couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or liquid vegetable soap to facilitate installation. Prior to proceeding with critical tie-ins submit sequence of work based on findings from "critical location" effort. Perform following additional procedures when working on plant sites. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Seventy-two hours prior to each plant shut down or connection, schedule coordination meeting with Owner’s Representative and Water Production personnel. At this meeting, present proposed sequencing of Work and verification of readiness to complete Work as required and within time permitted. Do not proceed with Work until Owner’s Representative agrees key personnel, equipment and materials are on hand to complete Work. Prior to fully excavating around existing piping, excavate as minimal as possible to confirm type and condition of existing joints. Verify size, type, and condition of pipe prior to ordering materials or fully mobilizing for Work. Do not proceed with connections to existing piping and identified critical stages of work unless approved by Owner’s Representative and the governing agency is present to observe. Coordinate with the governing agency to obtain reduction in operating pressures prior to performing connections to existing piping. Make connections to existing piping only when two valves are closed off between connection and source of water pressure. Do not make connection relying solely on one valve, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. Perform critical stages of Work identified on Drawings at night or during low water demand months as specified in Division 1. Excavation equipment used on plant sites to have smooth bucket; no teeth or side cutters. Submit to Owner’s Representative Lone Star Notification transmittal number prior to beginning excavation. Before each "dig" with mechanical excavator, probe ground to determine potential obstructions. Repeat procedure until existing pipe is located or excavation reaches desired elevation. Perform excavations within one foot to existing piping by hand methods. Provide adequate notice to pipe manufacture's representative when connecting or modifying existing prestressed or pretension concrete cylinder pipe. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 6 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 11. 12. 13. G. 3.6 Provide field surveyed (horizontal and vertical elevations) "as-builts" of new construction and existing underground utilities encountered. Submit in accordance with Division 1. Prior to performing plant work to be done on weekend, provide list of sites and contact person with phone numbers to Owner’s Representative by noon on Thursday of week. Contact person must be accessible during weekend, have Houston Metro Area phone number, and be authorized to make emergency decisions. No night work or plant shut down will be scheduled to begin two working days before or after designated Holidays. For tie-ins to existing water lines, provide necessary material on hand to facilitate connection prior to shutting down existing water line. Provide governing agency a minimum of two weeks notice prior to shutting down existing water line. JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe PVC, Steel, and DIP: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe, equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. After pipe sections are joined, check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. a. Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. b. Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by Owner’s Representative. Flanged Joints where required on Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe: 1. 2. 3. 4. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. Use galvanized or black nuts and bolts to match flange material. Use cadmium-plated steel nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges. Tighten bolts alternately (180° apart) until all are evenly tight. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. Provide Densco petroleum based tape or approved equal for all exposed portions of nuts, bolts and pipe. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. Furnish kits in accordance with City of Houston's "Approved Products List." ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 7 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 5. C. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. Welded Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Steel Pipe): 1. Prior to starting work, provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. 2. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30­inch and smaller. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36-inch and larger pipe. Bell-and-spigot, lap-welded slip joints: Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 ½ inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose; however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. Protect coal-tar-epoxy lining during welding by draping an 18-inch-wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-70XX. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass. Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt, slag or flux. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. Remove dirt, scale, and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings, or valves. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: a. Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36-inch and larger pipe. b. Use exterior welds for 30 inch and smaller. c. Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2 ½ degrees. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 8 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas d. 14. 15. 16. D. For large diameter water lines, employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Owner’s Representative, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test reports to Owner’s Representative for review. Owner’s Representative has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. 1) Weld acceptance criteria: a) Conduct in accordance with ASTM E165- Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination and ASTM E709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. Use X-ray methods for butt welds, for 100 percent of joint welds. b) Examine welded surfaces for the following defects: (1) Cracking (2) Lack of fusion/penetration (3) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) equals material thickness (4) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width (5) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width (6) Four or more relevant 1/16-inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds, so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated. Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after recertification. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24-inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. a. In addition to welding requirements contained here in Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. b. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. c. All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. d. Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C 210 or AWWA C 213. e. All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. Harnessed Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe): 1. 2. 3. Use of snap-ring type restrained joints on pipe is limited to 20-inch through 48-inch diameters. Position snap-ring joint bolt on top (12 o'clock portion). Provide minimum 1/2­inch joint recess. Use joint "diapers" minimum of 12 inches wide. For field adjustments with deflections beyond manufacturer's recommendations: ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 9 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 4. 5. E. Restrained Joints 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. F. a. Field trim spigot. b. Do not engage ring. Harnessed joints are not permitted in areas defined on Drawings as potentially petroleum contaminated material, in tunnels, or at bend greater than 5 degrees. Install harness type joints including snap rings at straight sections of pipe. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated and on use of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe for large diameter lines and ductile iron pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or use of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Owner’s Representative. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to Owner. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. For 16-inch lines and larger use minimum 16-foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. Installation. a. Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Examine and clean mechanism; remove dirt, debris and other foreign material. c. Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA food grade approved lubricant. d. Verify gasket is evenly seated. e. Do not over stab pipe into mechanism. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Division 32, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. Joint Grout (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Steel Pipe): 1. 2. 3. 4. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 1/2 cubic yard is required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required, grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes after mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 10 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess. Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot, strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Owner’s Representative for 20-inch pipe and smaller. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing, by other approved coatings, or by pointing with grout. Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metallizing or other approved protective coatings. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer, such as Flex Protex or equal, to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint closure. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 inches and Larger: Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces, fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Owner’s Representative of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. G. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick, use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling. Perform tests at no additional cost to Owner. H. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Owner’s Representative. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. 1. 2. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 11 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3. 4. 5. 6. I. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel, Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe and Fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.7 Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. For large diameter water lines, provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. CATHODIC PROTECTION APPURTENANCES A. 3.8 If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. Assessment of deflection may be measured by Owner’s Representative at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. Where identified on Drawings, modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line, or as shown on Drawings. B. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint. Repair coating As specified by appropriate AWWA standard, as recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by Owner’s Representative. C. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. SECURING, SUPPORTING AND ANCHORING A. Support piping as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section, to maintain line and grade and prevent transfer of stress to adjacent structures. B. Where shown on Drawings, anchor pipe fittings and bends installed on water line by welding consecutive joints of pipe together to distance each side of fitting. Restrained length, as shown on Drawings, assumes that installation of pipe and subsequent hydrostatic testing begins upstream and proceed downstream, with respect to normal flow of water in pipe. If installation and testing differs from this assumption, submit for approval revised method of restraining pipe joints upstream and downstream of device used to test against (block valve, blind flange or dished head plug). C. Use adequate temporary blocking of fittings when making connections to distribution system and during hydrostatic tests. Use sufficient anchorage and blocking to resist stresses and forces encountered while tapping existing water line. ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 12 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.9 POLYETHYLENE WRAP FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Double wrap pipe and appurtenances (except fire hydrants and fusion bond or polyurethane coated fittings) with 8-mil polyethylene film. B. Do not use polyethylene wrap if pipe is cathodically protected. C. Conform to requirements of Division 33. 3.10 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Provide cleanup and restoration crews to work closely behind pipe laying crews, and where necessary, during disinfection and hydrostatic testing, service transfers, abandonment of old water lines, backfill and surface restoration. B. Unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Once water line is installed to limits approved in layout submitted, immediately begin preparatory work for disinfection effort. No later than three days after completing disinfection preparatory work, execute disinfection work. Immediately after transfer of services, begin abandonment of old water lines and site restoration. Do not exceed a total of 50% of total project linear feet of disturbed right-of-way and easement until site is restored in accordance with Division 1. Exceeding any of the above footage limitations shall be considered a material breach of the Contract and subject to termination in accordance with the General Conditions. For large diameter water lines, do not install more than 2,000 linear feet of water line, without previous 2,000 linear feet being restored in accordance with Division 1. Schedule paving crews so repaving work will not lag behind pipe laying work by more than 1,000 linear feet. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be considered a material breach of the Contract and subject to termination in accordance with the General Conditions. 3.11 CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A. Remove construction debris or foreign material and thoroughly broom clean and flush piping systems. Provide temporary connections, equipment and labor for cleaning. Owner’s Representative must inspect water line for cleanliness prior to filling. 3.12 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Division 33. 3.13 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. Conform to requirements of Division 33. END OF SECTION 33 11 00 ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ______________________________________________________________________ Huckabee 33 11 00 - 14 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 12 13.10 - TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 1.5 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. B. ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. C. ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for HighPressure or High-Temperature Service. D. AWWA C 110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and other Liquids. E. AWWA C 200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 in. and Larger. F. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. G. AWWA C 500 - Standard for Metal Seated Gate Valves, for Water Supply Service. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit results of tapping sleeves NPT test opening. C. Submit manufacturer's affidavit as required in Division1. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. PART 2 Ship steel sleeves in wooden crates that provide protection from damage to epoxy coating during transport and storage. PRODUCTS Huckabee 33 12 13.10 - 1 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 2.1 MATERIALS A. Tapping Sleeves: 1. 2. 3. B. Welded-steel tapping-sleeve bodies may be used in lieu of cast or ductile iron bodies for following sizes and with following restrictions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Flange: ASTM A240 Stainless Steel, Type 304, ANSI 150 pound drilling. Gasket: Full circumferential, affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent rolling or binding during installation, compounded for water and sewer service. Stainless Steel sleeves are restricted to use on pipe sizes 4 inches and larger. Body: ASTM A240 Stainless Steel, Type 304. Bolts: ASTM A193 Stainless Steel, Type 304. Nuts: ASTM A194 Stainless Steel, Type 304. Branch Outlet: Heavy Stainless Steel Pipe. Provide approved stainless steel tapping sleeves. Do not use stainless steel sleeves for taps greater than 75 percent of pipe diameter. Tapping Valves: Meet requirements of Division 33 with following exceptions: 1. 2. 3. Huckabee Flange: AWWA C 207, Class D, ANSI 150 pound drilling. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent rolling or binding during installation. Steel sleeves are restricted to use on pipe sizes 6 inches and larger. Body: Heavy, welded-steel construction; top half grooved to retain neoprene O-ring seal permanently against outside diameter of pipe. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.5; coated with 100 percent vinyl resin or corrosive resistant material. Steel Sleeves Finish: Fusion-bonded epoxy coated to minimum 12 mil thickness. Finished Epoxy Coat: Free of laminations and blisters; and remain pliant and resistant to impact with non-peel finish. Provide approved steel tapping sleeves. Tapping Sleeves: Provide with 3/4-inch NPT test opening for testing prior to tapping. Provide 3/4-inch bronze plug for opening. Do not use steel sleeves for taps greater than 75 percent of pipe diameter. Stainless Steel tapping-sleeve bodies and flange may be used in lieu of cast or ductile iron bodies for following sizes and with following restrictions: 1. 2. D. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: AWWA C 110 cast or ductile iron or AWWA C 200 carbon steel in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength, corrosion-resistant, lowalloy steel bolts with mechanical joint ends. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve: a. Flanged, machined recess, AWWA C 207, Class D, ANSI 150 pound drilling. b. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent rolling or binding during installation. Use cast iron split sleeve where fire service from 6-inch water line is approved. Inlet Flanges: a. AWWA C 110; Class 125. b. AWWA C 110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum 8-hole flange. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint to fit any standard tapping machine. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap without contact with valve body; double disc. 33 12 13.10 - 2 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas E. PART 3 3.1 3.2 Valve Boxes: Standard Type "A" valve boxes conforming to requirements of Division 33. EXECUTION APPLICATION A. Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes shown on Drawings. Install sleeve so valve is in horizontally level position unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and pipe prior to installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for minimum of 15 minutes. Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation. D. When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size, use shell cutter one standard size smaller than water line being tapped. E. Do not use Large End Bell (LEB) increasers with next size tap unless existing pipe is asbestos-cement. INSTALLATION A. Verify outside diameter of pipe to be tapped prior to ordering sleeve. B. Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. C. Align tapping valve properly and attach to tapping sleeve. Insert insulation sleeves into flange holes of tapping valve and pipe. Make insertions of sleeves on pipe side of tapping valve. Do not damage insulation sleeves during bolt tightening process. D. Make tap with sharp, shell cutter: 1. 2. For 12-inch and smaller tap, use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less than nominal tap size. For 16-inch and larger tap, use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter. E. Withdraw coupon and flush cuttings from newly-made tap. F. Wrap: 1. 2. For 12-inch and smaller tap, wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with Division 2. For 16-inch and larger tap, apply coal tar epoxy around completed tapping sleeve and valve. The coal tar epoxy shall be applied with minimum of two (2) coats. Each coat of coal tar epoxy shall have minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils. G. Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (not over tapping sleeve and valve). H. Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling. I. Backfill in accordance with Division 31. END OF SECTION 33 12 13.10 Huckabee 33 12 13.10 - 3 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 12 13.12 – WET CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. 1.4 Wet connections for new water mains and service lines to existing water mains. AWWA C 800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. DEFINITIONS A. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with installed valves, draining the isolated sections, and completing the connections. B. Connection of 2-inch or smaller lines, which may be referred to on Drawings as "2-inch standard connections" or "gooseneck connections" will be measured as 2-inch wet connections. This item is not to be used as part of a 2-inch service line. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe shall conform to requirements of applicable portions of Division 33 related to piping materials and to water distribution. B. Corporation cocks and saddles shall conform to requirements in Division 33. C. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 33 12 16 – Water Utility Distribution Valves. D. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AWWA C 800. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONNECTION OPERATIONS A. Plan wet connections in such manner and at such hours as to least inconvenience public. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of making connections. B. Do not operate valves on mains in use by Owner. Owner Representative will handle, at no cost to Contractor, operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections. C. Conduct connection operations when Owner Representative is at job site. Connection work shall progress without interruption until complete once existing mains have been cut or plugs has been removed for making connections. Huckabee 33 12 13.12 - 1 WET CONNECTIONS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.02 2-INCH WET CONNECTIONS A. Tap water main. Use corporation cocks, saddles, copper tubing as required for line and grade adjustment, and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing main. Use 2-inch valves when indicated on Drawings for 2-inch copper gooseneck connections. END OF SECTION 33 12 13.12 Huckabee 33 12 13.12 - 2 WET CONNECTIONS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 12 16 – WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Gate valves. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 1.5 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile. B. ASTM B 62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Casting. C. ASTM D 429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. D. ASTM B 763 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Application. E. AWWA C 500 - Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. F. AWWA C 509 - Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. G. AWWA C 515- Standard for Reduced Wall, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. H. AWWA C 550 - Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. C. Provide detailed drawings of gearing mechanism for 20-inch and larger gate valves. QUALITY CONTROL A. PART 2 2.1 Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, AWWA C 515, and this Section, and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, and AWWA C 515. PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Huckabee Gate Valves: AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, AWWA C 515 and additional requirements of this Section. Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults open clockwise; aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. 33 12 16 - 1 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas B. If type of valve is not indicated on Drawings, use gate valves as line valves for sizes 20­inches and smaller. When type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C. Gate Valves 1-1/2 inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; singlewedge; disc type; screwed ends. D. Coatings for Gate Valves 2 inches and larger: AWWA C 550 non-toxic, imparts no taste to water, functions as physical, chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E. Gate Valves 2 inches in diameter: Iron body, double disc or resilient-seated, non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2-inch square nut operating clockwise to open. F. Gate Valves 3 inches to 12 inches in diameter: Non-directional, standard-wall resilient seated (AWWA C 509), parallel seat double disc (AWWA C 500), or reduced-wall resilient seated gate valves (AWWA C 515), 200 psig pressure rating, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide approved standard-wall resilient seated valves. Provide approved reduced-wall resilient seated valves. Provide approved double disc valves. Comply with following requirements unless otherwise specified in Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials, pressure rating, and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number-995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2-inches of 12 percent, non-rising. O-rings: For AWWA C 500, Section 3.12.2. For AWWA C 509, Sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. For AWWA C 515, Section 4.2.2.5. Stem Seals Consist of three O-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with antifriction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. G. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. H. Resilient Wedge: Molded, synthetic rubber, vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or exceed ASTM D 429 Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. I. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.4, AWWA C 509 Section 4.4 or AWWA C 515 Section 4.4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. J. Gate valves 14 inch and larger in Diameter: AWWA C 500; parallel seat double disc gate valves; push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide approved double disc valves with 150 psig pressure rating. Comply with following requirements unless otherwise specified on Drawings: 1. 2. Huckabee Body: Cast iron or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Cast following into valve body manufacturer's initials, pressure rating, and year manufactured. When horizontally mounted, equip valves greater in diameter than 12 inches with rollers, tracks, and scrapers. O rings: For AWWA C 500, Section 3.12.2. For AWWA C 515, Section 4.2.2.5. 33 12 16 - 2 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. K. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number-995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2-inches of 12 percent, non-rising. Stem Nut: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. Stem Seals: Consist of three O-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with antifriction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.4 or AWWA C 515 Section 4.4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely penned into machined dovetailed grooves. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. Provide bypass for valves 24 inches and larger. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on, cast-iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. Gear Cases: Cast iron; furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or O-rings at shaft openings. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. Gate valves 14 inches to 24 inches: Provide AWWA C 515; reduced-wall, resilient seated gate valves with 250 psig pressure rating. Furnish with spur or bevel gearing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Mount valves horizontally if proper ground clearance cannot be achieved by normal vertical installation. For horizontally mounted gate valves, provide bevel operation gear mounted vertically for above ground operation. Use valve body, bonnet, wedge, and operator nut constructed of ductile iron. Fully encapsulate exterior of ductile iron wedge with rubber. Ensure wedge is symmetrical and seals equally well with flow in either direction. Provide ductile iron operator nut with four flats at stem connection to apply even input torque to the stem. Bolts: AWWA C515, Section 4.4.4, Stainless Steel; cadmium plated or zinc coated. Provide high strength bronze stem and nut. O-rings: AWWA C515, Section 4.2.2.5, pressure O-rings as gaskets. Provide stem sealed by three O-rings. Top two O-rings are to be replaceable with valve fully open at full rated working pressure. Provide thrust washers to the thrust collar for easy valve operation. L. Gate Valves Extension Stem: When shown on Drawings, provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade or as shown on Drawings. Support extension stem with an arm attached to wall of manhole or structure that loosely holds extension stem and allows rotation in the axial direction only. M. Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service) Type Meter Installations: Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.; flanged, Class 125; clockwise to close. N. Gate Valves for Tapping Steel Pipe: Provide double disc gate valve. Resilient wedge gate valve shall only be installed in a vertical position. O. Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. Huckabee 33 12 16 - 3 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas PART 3 E X E C U T I O N 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Division 31. B. Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.2 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B. Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Drawings. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face when less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C. For pipe section of each riser, use only 6 inch, ductile iron Class 51, or DR18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Riser must be installed to allow complete access for operation of valve. D. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A. Assist Owner’s Representative with disinfection of valves and appurtenances as required by Division 33 and test as required by Division 33. B. Double-Disc Gate Valves: Apply hydrostatic test pressure equal to twice rated working pressure of valve between discs. Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem seals. Test at rated working pressure, applied between discs. Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem seals. Do not exceed leakage rate of 1 oz/hr/inch of nominal valve size. C. Solid-Wedge Gate Valves: Apply hydrostatic pressure equal to twice rated working pressure of valve with both ends bulkheaded and gate open. Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem seals. Test at rated working pressure, applied through bulkheads alternately to each side of closed gate with opposite side open for inspection. Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem-seals. Do not exceed leakage rate of 1 oz/hr/inch of nominal valve size. D. 3.4 Repair or replace valves which exceed leakage rate. PAINTING OF VALVES A. Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground with approved paint. END OF SECTION 33 12 16 Huckabee 33 12 16 - 4 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION VALVES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 12 19 – WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire hydrants. B. Adjustment of fire hydrants and gate valves. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. AWWA C 550 - Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants B. SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning C. SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning D. SSPC SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning E. SSPC SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal F. SSPC Paint Spec No.21 G. SSPC-Paint 21 - White or Colored Silicone Alkyd Paint H. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II I. SSPC-Paint 104 - White or Tinted Alkyd Paint J. Federal Standard A-A-2962A - Enamel, Alkyd, Solvent Based Low VOC SUBMITTALS A. B. PART 2 2.1 Conform to requirements of Division 1. Submit name of hydrant manufacturer, type of bonnet paint, and engineering control drawing number for hydrant proposed for use. PRODUCTS HYDRANTS A. Provide approved fire hydrants. B. The Owner’s Representative may, at any time prior to or during installation of hydrants, randomly select furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at Owner’s expense, to verify compliance with Specifications. When hydrant is found to be noncompliant, replace, at Contractor's expense, hydrants, with hydrants that comply with Specifications. Huckabee 33 12 19 - 1 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas C. 2.2 LEADS A. 2.3 Provide lower hydrant barrel fabricated from Ductile Iron Pipe as single piece, connected to upper hydrant barrel by means of joint coupling that will provide three hundred sixty degree (360) rotation of upper barrel. Branches (Leads): Conform to requirements of Division 33. HYDRANT PAINTING A. New hydrants and refurbished hydrants shall be shop coated as specified herein. B. Exterior Above Traffic Flange (Including Bolts & Nuts). 1. 2. 3. C. D. Huckabee Surface preparation to be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 (MACE 2) near white blast cleaned surface. Coat with three coat alkyd/silicone alkyd system with total dry film thickness (DFT) of 6 - 9 mils as follows: a. Prime Coat - Oil modified alkyd primer, to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 25. Total dry film thickness (DFT) 2 - 3 mils. b. Intermediate Coat - Heavy Duty Industrial Alkyd Enamel to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 104, and Federal Standard AA­2962A. Total dry film thickness (DFT) of 2 -3 mils. c. Finish Coat - Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamelto be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Total dry film thickness (DFT) to be 2 - 3 mils. Exception – hydrant bonnet shall not be finished shop coated, only intermediate coated. Install color coded finish coating of bonnet in field. d. Bonnet Paint - Field apply finish coat of Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Dry film thickness of 2 - 3 mils. Bonnet colors are to be as specified in Paragraph 3.01 to designate the appropriate size of water supply line. Colors - Primer: Manufacturers standard color. Finish coat of hydrant body : As specified by Owner . Connection caps: Finished coated white. Paint white band of finish coat two (2) inches in width on hydrant body approximately six inches (6") above and parallel to traffic flange. Intermediate coat: Contrasting color to blue finish, such as white. Field Maintenance Painting (Exterior Above Traffic Flange) 1. Surface Preparation to be in accordance with SSPC - SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC -SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, depending on condition of existing paint and extent of corrosion. It is not necessary to remove tightly adhered mill scale, rust, and paint. Mill scale, rust and paint are considered tightly adherent when they cannot be removed with dull putty knife. In some severe cases where it is necessary to remove majority of existing paint, surface should be cleaned in accordance with SSPC -SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 2. When surface is cleaned to bare metal (SSPC - SP11), coat hydrant with three coat Alkyd/Silicone Alkyd system in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.B.2 as for new hydrants. When surface is cleaned to SSPC - SP2 or SSPC - SP3, coat hydrant with Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamelin general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21. Total dry film thickness of 3 - 6 mils. Exterior Below Traffic Flange 33 12 19 - 2 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 1. 2. 3. E. Interior Surfaces Above and Below Water Line Valve 1. 2. PART 3 3.1 Surface preparation in accordance with SSPC- SP10 (MACE 2) Near White Blast Cleaned Surface. Primer and intermediate coat: coal tar epoxy in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 16. Apply two (2) coats with dry film thickness (DFT) of 8 - 10 mils each for total DFT of 16 -20 mils. Finish coat: Water based vinyl acrylic mastic Apply one coat with dry film thickness of 6 - 8 mils. Color of finish coat to be same as finish coat for exterior above traffic flange, i.e., blue. (Acro 555 Crystal Blue, or equivalent.) Material used for internal coating of hydrant interior ferrous surfaces below water line valve must be NSF certified as suitable for contact with potable water as required by Chapter 290, Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems, Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission. Coating shall be liquid or powder epoxy system in accordance with AWWA Standard C - 550 (latest revision). Coating may be applied in two or three coats, according to manufacturer's recommendations, for total dry film thickness of 12 -18 mils. EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Drawings. When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place 1-inch-thick piece of standard sidewalk expansion joint material around section of barrel passing through concrete. B. Locate nozzle center line minimum 18 inches above finish grade. C. Place 12-inch by 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other material approved by Owner’s Representative) on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire hydrants installed on new water lines not in service. Remove indicators after new water line is tested and approved by Owner’s Representative. D. Do not cover drain ports when placing concrete thrust block. E. Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval in writing prior to installation of hydrants which require changes in bury depth due to obstructions not shown on Drawings. Unit price adjustments will not be allowed for changes in water line flow line or fire hydrant barrel length caused by obstructions. F. Plug branch lines to valves and fire hydrants shown on Drawings to be removed. Deliver fire hydrants designated for salvage to nearest Utility Maintenance Quadrant Facility. G. Install branches (leads) in accordance with Division 33. H. Coating Requirements: 1. 2. Huckabee Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of applied system. Furnish affidavit of compliance that coatings furnished complies with requirements of this specification and referenced standards, as applicable. 33 12 19 - 3 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas I. Field coat hydrant bonnet to indicate size of water line supplying hydrant or tested flow at the fire hydrant as directed by the Fire Marshall or Owner. J. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials and debris in accordance with requirements of Division 1. END OF SECTION 33 12 19 Huckabee 33 12 19 - 4 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 12 40 - VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Valve boxes for water service. B. Meter boxes for water service. C. Meter vaults for water service. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 1.4 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. B. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. E. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. F. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Division 1. B. Submit manufacturers’ product data for following items for approval: 1. 2. 3. Each type of valve box and lid. Each type of meter box and cover. Each type of meter vault frame and cover. C. Submit design calculations and shop drawings for precast vault elements, sealed by an Engineer registered in State of Texas. D. Submit shop drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed construction varies from Drawings. E. Submit manufacturer's certification that plastic meter boxes meet requirements of Paragraph 2.05, Plastic Meter Boxes. Huckabee 33 12 40 - 1 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS VALVE BOXES A. Provide approved Type A, cast-iron/ductile-iron, slide-type, valve boxes. Design of valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid. B. Cast letter “W” into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving potable water lines. C. Unless otherwise specified, uncoated cast iron. D. Riser Pipe. 1. 2. 3. E. Concrete for valve box placement: 1. 2. 2.2 2.4 2.5 For locations in new concrete pavement, provide strength and mix design of new pavement. For other locations, provide concrete for sidewalks conforming to requirements of Division 32. METER BOXES A. 2.3 Provide 6-inch PVC, Class 150, DR 18, riser pipes in accordance with Division 33 or 6-inch ductile-iron, thickness Class 51 riser pipes in accordance with Division 33. Provide single section of pipe. Provide meter boxes as required by the governing authority and as shown on the drawings. CAST-IRON METER BOXES A. Cast-Iron Boxes: Clean and free from sand blow-holes or other defects conforming to requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30B. Bearing surfaces shall be machined so that covers seat evenly in frames. B. Boxes and lids shall have dipped, coal-tar-pitch, varnish finish. C. Provide lock-type meter boxes when required by Drawings. Lock mechanisms shall work with ease. CONCRETE METER BOXES A. Concrete Meter Boxes: Made of Class A concrete, with minimum 4000 psi compressive strength, conforming to requirements of Division 32. Construct to dimensions shown on Drawings. B. Castings: Free from fractures, large or deep cracks, blisters or surface roughness or any other defects that may affect serviceability. PLASTIC METER BOXES A. Huckabee Plastic Meter Boxes: Made of high density polyethylene conforming to the following ASTM standards: 33 12 40 - 2 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas ASTM D 256 Impact Strength = 1/9 ft.-lb./inch (Izod, Notched) D 256 Impact Strength – 6.4 ft.-lb./inch (Izod, Un-Notched) D 638 Tensile Strength (2.0 min.) = 3400 psi D 648 Deflection Temperature = 170 degrees F D 2240 Shore D, Hardness, 55-65 Impact Strength, Falling Dart Method, 160 inchlb. D 790 Flexural Modulus = 90,000 psi B. Meter boxes shall meet the following test requirements: 1. 2. 3. 2.6 3.2 Static Load: Not less than 2500 pounds using 6-inch disc with direct compression exerted at center of top of meter box with solid plastic lid. Deflection: Not less than 1000 pounds load required to deflect top edge of meter box 1/8- inch. Meter box body, without lid, shall weigh approximately 7 pounds. METER VAULTS A. Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or common brick masonry unless a specific type of construction is required by Drawings. B. Concrete for Meter Vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Division 32 with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. C. Reinforcing steel for meter vaults: Conform to requirements of Division 32. D. Grates and Covers: Conform to requirements of Division 33. PART 3 3.1 REQUIREMENT EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Obtain approval from Owner’s Representative for location of meter vault. B. Verify lines and grade are correct. C. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. VALVE BOXES A. Install riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Drawings or to accommodate actual finish grade. 1. 2. B. Huckabee Install with bell on top of valve. Place riser pipe in plumb, vertical position. Install valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6-inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end, and interior contact flange of valve box, for vertical movement damping. End of pipe resting on valve shall be notched out sufficiently to provide a snug fit around the valve bonnet and to center valve inside of pipe. 33 12 40 - 3 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 3.4 C. Set, align, and adjust valve box so that lid is level with final grade. D. Paint covers of new valve boxes in fluorescent orange when installed. After completion and acceptance by Owner, repaint covers black. METER BOXES A. Install cast iron or plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on Drawings. C. Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in Paragraph 3.05, Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults. D. Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Owner’s Representative. Use approved traffic-type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas. METER VAULTS A. Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions shown on Drawings. Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom uniform. Verify lines and grades are correct and compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. B. Precast Meter Vaults: 1. 2. C. D. Meter Vault Floor Slab: 1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter, or 12 inches square, and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Drawings. Install dowels at maximum of 18 inches, center-to-center for keying walls to floor slab. 2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction. Cast-in-Place Meter Vault Walls: 1. 2. 3. 3.5 Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Set level on a minimum 3-inch-thick bed of sand conforming to requirements of Division 31. Seal lifting holes with cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout. Key walls to floor slab and form to dimensions shown on Drawings. Minimum wall thickness shall be 4 inches. Cast walls monolithically. One cold joint will be allowed when vault depth exceeds 12 feet. Set frame for cover in concrete. FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS A. Set cast iron frame in a mortar bed and adjust elevation of cover as follows: 1. 2. Huckabee In unpaved areas, set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches above natural grade. In paved areas, set top of meter box or meter vault cover flush with adjacent concrete but no higher than 1/2-inch. 33 12 40 - 4 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.6 BACKFILL A. Provide bank run sand in accordance with Division 31 and backfill and compact in accordance with Division 31. B. In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform slope 1­to-5 slope from top to natural grade. C. In paved areas, slope concrete down from meter box or vault to meet adjacent paved area. END OF SECTION 33 12 40 Huckabee 33 12 40 - 5 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Huckabee 33 12 40 - 6 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 13 00 – DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Disinfection of potable water lines. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. 1.3 Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. REFERENCES A. AWWA C 651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. PART 2 P R O D U C T S -Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 CONDUCTING DISINFECTION A. Promptly disinfect water lines constructed before tests are conducted on water lines and before water lines are connected to Public water distribution system. B. Contractor shall provide water for disinfection at no additional charge to the Owner. C. Unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents, Contractor will conduct disinfection operations. D. Coordinate chlorination operations through Owner’s Representative. PREPARATION A. Provide temporary blind flanges, cast-iron sleeves, plugs, necessary service taps, copper service leads, risers and jumpers of sizes, location and materials, and other items needed to facilitate disinfection of new water lines prior to connection to Public water distribution system. Normally, each valved section of water line requires two each 3/4-inch taps. A 2­inch minimum blow-off is required for water lines up to and including 6-inch diameter. B. Use fire hydrants as blow-offs to flush newly constructed water lines 8 inch diameters and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on water lines, install temporary blow-off valves and remove promptly upon successful completion of disinfection and testing. C. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in manner approved by Owner’s Representative. Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than one foot per second and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 feet per second. Before beginning disinfection operations, expel air from pipeline. D. Backfill excavations immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs. E. Install blow-off valves at end of water line to facilitate flushing of dead-end water lines. Install permanent blow-off valves according to drawings. Huckabee 33 13 00 - 1 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.3 DISINFECTION BY CONTRACTOR A. The following procedure will be used when disinfection by Contractor is required by Contract Documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.4 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING A. 3.5 Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with AWWA C 651. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period. If chemical compound is used for sterilizing agent, place in pipes as directed by Owner’s Representative. After disinfection and flushing of water lines, bacteriological tests will be performed by the governing agency or testing laboratory in accordance with Division 1. When test results indicate need for additional disinfection of water lines based upon Texas Department of Health requirements, assist Contractor shall provide additional disinfection operations at no additional cost to the Owner. COMPLETION A. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION 33 13 00 Huckabee 33 13 00 - 2 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas SECTION 33 13 00.10 - HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Field hydrostatic testing of newly installed water pipelines. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price. PART 2 P R O D U C T S – Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 PREPARATION A. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing. B. Hydrostatically test newly installed water pipelines after disinfection, when required, and before connecting to Public water distribution system. C. Water for testing will be charged to Contractor in accordance with applicable Ordinances. Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain a transient meter from the appropriate governing authority. Contractor shall pay all fees associated with transient meter. D. Test pipelines in lengths between valves, or plugs, of not more than 4,000 feet. E. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Owner’s Representative. TEST PROCEDURES A. Furnish, install, and operate connections, pump, meter and gages necessary for hydrostatic testing. B. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Periods of up to 7 days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated. C. For small diameter pipelines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 125 psi. For large diameter water lines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 150 psi. D. Begin test by 9:00 a.m. unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. When large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure during test, discontinue testing until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. E. Keep valves inside pressure reducing stations closed during hydrostatic pressure test. ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE FOR WATERLINES A. Huckabee During hydrostatic tests, no leakage will be allowed for sections of water lines consisting of welded joints. 33 13 00.10 - 1 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES Montgomery ISD – Existing Intermediate School Conversion to Elementary School (1697-06-01) Montgomery, Texas 3.4 3.5 B. Maximum allowable leakage for water lines with rubber gasketed joints: 3.19 gallons per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing. C. For meter run installation, when work cannot be isolated and line fails pressure test, visual inspection of work by Owner’s Representative for leakage during pressure test may be used to fulfill requirements of this section. CORRECTION FOR FAILED TESTS A. Repair joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on test. Check valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or invalidate test. Remove cracked or defective pipes, fittings, and valves discovered during pressure test and replace with new items. B. Owner’s Representative may require failed lines to be disinfected after repair and prior to retesting. Conduct and pay for subsequent disinfection operations in accordance with requirements of Division 33. Pay for water required for additional disinfection and retesting. C. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. COMPLETION A. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, remove risers remaining from disinfection and hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION 33 13 00.10 Huckabee 33 13 00.10 - 2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES Job No. Drawn By: Date: Sheet No. EXISTING MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL WATER LINE FOR MONTGOMERY, I.S.D. 700 DR. MARTIN LUTHER KING JR DR. MONTGOMERY, TX 77356 Project: ADDENDUM 2 Revision / 12-01-16 Date UP UP UP DN UP UP DN DN Job No. Drawn By: Date: Sheet No. EXISTING MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL WATER LINE FOR MONTGOMERY, I.S.D. 700 DR. MARTIN LUTHER KING JR DR. MONTGOMERY, TX 77356 Project: ADDENDUM 2 Revision / 12-01-16 Date Job No. Drawn By: Date: Sheet No. EXISTING MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL WATER LINE FOR MONTGOMERY, I.S.D. 700 DR. MARTIN LUTHER KING JR DR. MONTGOMERY, TX 77356 Project: ADDENDUM 2 Revision / 12-01-16 Date NOTE: NOTE: AT NEW INFILL OR NEW OPENING IN EXISTING MASONRY, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR STABILITY DURING ERECTION AS EXISTING MATERIALS ARE REMOVED FROM OPENINGS AND NEW INFILL IS CONSTRUCTED BEFORE NEW INFILL CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETED. CONTRACTOR HAS THE OPTION TO ROUT OUT BEDJOINTS, INSTALL NEW TEMPORARY STEEL ANGLES, SHIM NEW TO EXISTING WITH SLATE SHIMS IN MORTAR, REMOVE STEEL ANGLES, AND POINT MORTAR JOINTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEMPORARY SHORING DESIGN. ALL NEW MASONRY SHALL BE TOOTHED INTO EXISTING MASONRY FOR CONTINUOUS UNINTERRUPTED BOND WITH EXISTING MASONRY. 1. SAWCUT OUT AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW TEMPORARY L7x4x3/8 (LLV) EACH SIDE OF EXISTING WALL WITH BOND BREAKER BETWEEN ANGLES AND EXISTING MASONRY. ANGLES TO BEAR 8 INCHES AT EACH END ON EXISTING FULL-HEIGHT MASONRY TO REMAIN. (e.g. 24 INCHES PAST NEW CMU OPENING SHOWN BELOW TO EXTEND 8 INCHES ON FULL-HEIGHT EXISTING MASONRY JAMB TO REMAIN, AVOIDING TOOTHED AREA) THIS DOCUMENT IS RELEASED FOR THE PURPOSE OF INTERIM REVIEW UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF R. CRAIG McKEE, P.E. 111569. IT IS NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES 12.1.2016 2. SAW CUT AND REMOVE EXISTING MASONRY PER ARCHITECT. F-1252 F-1252 3. INSTALL NEW MASONRY WITH NEW STONE SHIMS IN NEW MORTAR (BEHIND STEEL ANGLES) BETWEEN EXISTING MASONRY AND NEW MASONRY AS REQUIRED TO KEEP PROPER MORTAR BEDJOINT HEIGHT. LOCATIONS WHERE THIS DETAIL OCCURS ARE NOT SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SECTION, DEMO PLANS, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS TO DETERMINE WHERE THIS DETAILS OCCURS MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 4. REMOVE TEMPORARY L7x4x3/8 ANGLES AND FILL REMAINDER OF BEDJOINTS WITH NEW MORTAR. CMU WALL ABOVE LINTEL SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN ONE HALF THE SPAN ON THE LINTEL FOR SCHEDULED LINTELS. EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN EXISTING VENEER PER ARCH HATCHED AREA INDICATES EXISTING MASONRY TO REMAIN REF LINTEL SECTION FOR LINTEL DEPTH AND REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED #5 CONT TOP AND BOTTOM LINTEL SECTION NEW CMU LINTEL THICKNESS TO MATCH EXISTING WALL (6" CMU MIN) NEW DOWEL #5 2'-0"x2'-0" NEW CMU LINTEL FILL THIS VERTICAL CELL WITH CONCRETE AND REINF WITH (1) #5 CMU LINTEL NOTES: 1. A MINIMUM OF 0'-8" BEARING SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EACH END OF CMU LINTELS WHERE THE SPAN IS LESS THAN 7'-11" 2. ALL CELLS FOR CMU LINTELS SHALL BE GROUTED SOLID 3. THE MAXIMUM CLEAR SPAN OF THE NEW LINTEL SHALL BE 3'-4" Project: REF 1/S0.5.2 FOR VENEER LINTEL AT CMU WALL 2' - 0" C:\Users\rgilmore\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_STRUCTURAL - R14_RGILMORE.rvt 2 NEW CMU NEW DOWEL TO FOUNDATION BELOW WITH (1) #5 INTO HILTI HIT-HY 200 ANCHOR 1 S0.5.1 TYPICAL NEW OPENINGS OR INFILL IN CMU WALL 3/4" = 1'-0" Job. No. 1697-06-01 Date: 12/01/16 Sheet No. 2 ADDENDUM 2 S0.5.1 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. EXISTING CMU WALL ABOVE EXISTING MASONRY VENEER PER ARCH NEW CMU LINTEL PER 1/S0.5.1 CONT 3/8" THICK BENT PLATE TO BE STOPPED 1/2" SHORT OF VENEER OPENING ON BOTH SIDES 3/8" EPOXY ANCHOR WITH MIN 3 3/8" EMBEDMENT AT 16" OC LOCATED IN CENTER OF GROUTED CMU CELL NON-GALVANIZED CONT 3/8" THICK PLATE (TYP) 1/4" (10'-0" MAX) TOP OF EXISTING VENEER HEIGHT OF EXISTING VENEER 3-12 NEW OPENING IN CMU WALL 1" CLR PER EXISTING (6-3/4" MAX) VENEER LINTEL AT CMU WALL 2 S0.5.2 12.1.2016 TYPICAL MASONRY VENEER SUPPORT DETAIL F-1252 3/4" = 1'-0" Project: MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS Job. No. 1697-06-01 Date: 12/01/16 Sheet No. ADDENDUM 2 2 S0.5.2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. C:\Users\rgilmore\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_STRUCTURAL - R14_RGILMORE.rvt 2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. Revision / 1 2 Date 11/23/16 12/1/16 ADDENDUM 1 ADDENDUM 2 1 1 Project: ALT. #1: REPLACE FACSIA ON EXISTING CANOPY AND REPAIR DAMAGED/SEPERATED SOFFIT AS DETERMINED BY THE DISTRICT. SOFFIT REPAIR SCOPE, NOT TO EXCEED 50% OF EXISTING CONDITION MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS EXISTING BUILDING EXISTING CANOPY 1 1 ALT. #1: REPLACE FACSIA ON EXISTING CANOPY AND REPAIR DAMAGED/SEPERATED SOFFIT AS DETERMINED BY THE DISTRICT. SOFFIT REPAIR SCOPE, NOT TO EXCEED 50% OF EXISTING CONDITION ALT. #2: REPLACE MTL. ROOF AND REPAINT EXISTING STRUCTURE OF MTL. AWNINGS (OR) ALT. #3: REPLACE MTL. CANOPY IN ITS' ENTIRETY, REF. A9.1 FOR DETAILS ALT. #1: REPLACE FACSIA ON EXISTING CANOPY AND REPAIR DAMAGED/SEPERATED SOFFIT AS DETERMINED BY THE DISTRICT. SOFFIT REPAIR SCOPE, NOT TO EXCEED 50% OF EXISTING CONDITION 2 1 ALT. #1: REPLACE FACSIA ON EXISTING CANOPY AND REPAIR DAMAGED/SEPERATED SOFFIT AS DETERMINED BY THE DISTRICT. SOFFIT REPAIR SCOPE, NOT TO EXCEED 50% OF EXISTING CONDITION DEMO EXISTING MTL. CANOPY. PATCH AND PAINT EXPOSED WALL TO MATCH EXISTING. 1 SITE PLAN VOLUME Job No. 1697-06-01 1 AS1.1 SITE PLAN LEVEL 1" = 20'-0" N C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:12 AM EXISTING GYM TRUE Drawn By: CL Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. AS1.1 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. CEILINGS B. EXISTING ELECTRICAL POWER SERVING THE EXISTING FACILITY WILL REMAIN ON LINE. DISRUPTIONS REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTION TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE SCHOOL DISTRICT REPRESENTATIVE ASSIGNED TO THIS SPECIFIC PROJECT. DOORS & WINDOWS C1 F4 C1 F4 1.52 MECH. 1.55 DRY 1.53 MECH. D2 D2 E. CONTRACTOR WILL KEEP OPENINGS TO THE EXTERIOR TEMPORARILY COVERED FOR PROTECTION FROM WATER. D3. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND/OR WINDOW AND FRAME (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL). PATCH, REPAIR, AND CLEAN OPENING. F. CONTRACTOR WILL KEEP OPENINGS TEMPORARILY COVERED FOR PEDESTRIAN SAFETY. ALT. #5: D4. REMOVE EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND/OR WINDOW AND FRAME (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL). PREPARE FOR NEW DOORAND FRAME, TO MATCH EXISTING, AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. COORDINATE WITH DOOR SCHEDULE. C1 1.51 YARD EQ./MAINT. G. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING REQUIRED FOR DEMOLITION. H. REFER TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL PENETRATIONS AND OTHER RELATED DEMOLITION OR EQUIPMENT REMOVAL. FLOORS D2 F1. SAW CUT FLOOR AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW PLUMBING. REF. PLUMBING FOR EXACT LOCATION. D2 M2 D2 1.50 TOILET 1 1.32 GRADE 2 1.36 GRADE 2 C1 F4 1.61 KITCHEN 1 1.54 PREP 1.49 LOCKERS 1.57 COOLER D2 C1 D2 D2 D2 1.58 FREEZER M1.REMOVE EXISTING CASEWORK M2 1.31 KINDERGARTEN 1.48 STORAGE 1 C1 F4 1.30 TLT M2. REMOVE EXISTING LOCKERS 1.63 SERVING C1 1.37 KINDERGARTEN D2 1.59 DRESSING D2 1 1.29 STOR D2 P2 D2 ALT. #4: P2. REMOVE ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES AND PARTITIONS. PREPARE TO RECIEVE NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES, PRE PLUMB, AND PARTITIONS AS SHOWN. 1.45 MEN 1.27 TESTING C1 P2 W4 F2 W4 F2 P2 W4 F2 P2 D2 1.46 WOMEN 1.42 GIRLS 1.41 BOYS 1.47 CORRIDOR D2 C1 D2 D2 C1 C1 UP P2 D2 F4 D2 D2 D2 1.40 STOR 1.26 CORRIDOR F4 C1 D2 1.10 GIRLS D2 1.07 CORRIDOR P2 F2 1.25 BOOKROOM P2 1.11 MECH. C1 W1. REMOVE EXISTING WALL PARTITION (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL) IN ITS ENTIRETY, INCLUDING BASE, DOORS, WINDOWS, OUTLETS, SWITCHES, AND ANY ITEM ATTACHED TO OR ASSOCIATED WITH THE WALL PARTITION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING IN EXISTING WALLS AND TERMINATE OR RELOCATE AS REQUIRED FOR CONTRACT WORK. PATCH, REPAIR, AND CLEAN ALL ADJACENT WALLS AND PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW PARTITION WALLS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. T. ADDITIONAL MATERIALS, WHERE CONSTRUCTION ADJOINS EXISTING, NOT SPECIFICALLY IDENTIFIED IN THE DEMOLITION PLANS, WILL BE REMOVED AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE CONSTRUCTION. THESE MATERIALS TYPICALLY INCLUDE MATERIAL PROJECTION BEYOND THE FACE OF THE WALL, INCLUDING BRICK SILLS, OTHER PROJECTIONS, AND ROOF FLASHINGS, GUTTERS, AND TRIMS. REFER TO WALL SECTIONS FOR SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. U. INVESTIGATE EACH WALL SUBJECT TO DEMOLITION TO DETERMINE IF IT IS USED FOR BEARING. COORDINATE WITH CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE AND PROVIDE SHORING AT ANY WALL CARRYING STRUCTURAL LOAD TO PREVENT COLLAPSE UNTIL NEW STRUCTURE IS IN PLACE. V. OWNER RESERVES FIRST RIGHT TO RETAIN AND KEEP ANY EXISTING ITEMS REMOVED AS A PART OF THE DEMOLITION WORK. ALT. #4A: W4. REMOVE EXISTING CERAMIC TILE AND BACKING LAYER OF GYP. BOARD. REPLACE GYP. BD. WITH NEW TO CREATE LEVEL WALL WITH ANY ADJACENT EXISTING GYP. WALL BOARD AND PREPARE FOR NEW FINISHES AS SCHEDULED. F4 1.08 ALCOVE C1 S. PRECAUTIONS WILL BE TAKEN TO SEPARATE STUDENTS AND SCHOOL STAFF FROM DEMOLITION AND TO PROECT THEIR HEALTH AND SAFETY. W3. REMOVE EXISTING WALL PARTITION (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL) IN ITS ENTIRETY, INCLUDING BASE, DOORS, WINDOWS, OUTLETS, SWITCHES, AND ANY ITEM ATTACHED TO OR ASSOCIATED WITH THE WALL PARTITION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING IN EXISTING WALLS AND TERMINATE OR RELOCATE AS REQUIRED FOR CONTRACT WORK. PATCH, REPAIR, AND CLEAN ALL ADJACENT WALLS. C1 F4 W4 WALLS W2. SHORE, BRACE, AND SAW CUT OPENING INTO EXISTING WALL. PREPARE OPENING TO RECEIVE NEW DOOR OR WINDOW, FRAME, AND HARDWARE AS SCHEDULED. 1.06 CAFETERIA D2 R. DEMOLITION WILL FOLLOW THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PROVIDED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. P3. REMOVE ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES AND PARTITIONS. PREPARE TO RECIEVE NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES, PRE PLUMB, AND PARTITIONS AS SHOWN. C1 F4 1.39 TLT Q. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATERIALS WILL BE REMOVED FROM SITE AND DISPOSED OF AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE, DISPOSAL WILL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL GUIDELINES. P2 P2 W4 F2 C1 F4 P. DEMOLITION, AS NOTED, CONSISTS OF COMPLETE REMOVAL OF THE LISTED ITEMS, RELATED FASTENERS, AND ATTACHMENT MATERIALS LEAVING A CLEAN SURFACE READY TO RECEIVE NOTED MATERIALS OR SCHEDULED FINISHES. P1. REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES. TERMINATE OR RELOCATE UTILITIES AS REQUIRED. REF. PLUMBING. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR BRACING AND COLUMN REPLACEMENT IF APPLICABLE. D2 D2 1.43 ARTROOM 1.34 CORRIDOR D2 C1 D2 D2 D2 PLUMBING 1.60 HR D4 O.REFER TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND ROOF PLAN DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION NOT SPECIFICALLY COVERED BY DEMOLITION PLANS, ESPECIALLY RELATIVE TO MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING H.V.A.C. SYSTEMS. M4. REMOVE EXISTING AC WALL UNIT. PREPARE TO RECIEVE NEW UNIT. REF. MECH. P2 1.44 LOST & FOUND N. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. M3. REMOVE AND DISPOSE EXISTING COUNTERTOP. PREPARE TO RECIEVE NEW COUNTERTOP AS SHOWN. D2 C1 C1 F4 1.28 SPEECH M. CONTRACTOR WILL MAINTAIN SITE DRAINAGE DEVICES AND COMPONENTS DURING THE COURSE OF DEMOLITION AND UP UNTIL NEW WORK IS IN PLACE. THIS INCLUDES EXISTING SUBSOIL DRAINAGE. MISCELLANEOUS 1 D2 L. THIS EXISTING FACILITY WILL REMAIN FUNCTIONAL DURING THE COURSE OF THE DEMOLITION WORK. CONTRACTOR WILL MAINTAIN DUST BARRIERS, BARRICADES, PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION, WATER PROTECTION, AND SAFETY DEVICES IN PLACE AT ALL TIMES DURING AND AFTER DEMOLITION UNTIL NEW WORK IS INSTALLED. F5. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN AND FILL WITH SELF LEVELING FLOOR TOPPING. PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH AS SCHEDULED. C1 D2 K. DEMOLITION WORK TIMES WILL BE COORDINATED WITH THE SCHOOL DISTRICT REPRESENTATIVE ASSIGNED TO THIS SPECIFIC PROJECT. F4. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISH AND BASE. (REF. FINISH LEGEND ON A1 SHEETS FOR FLOOR FINISHES NOTED THIS SHEET.) FILL ANY BLEMISHES IN EXISTING FLOOR WITH FLOOR TOPPING. PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH AS SCHEDULED. 1.62 OFFICE P2 J. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ADJACENT TO DEMOLITION WORK WILL BE PATCHED AND REPAIRED TO MATCH ORIGINAL CONDITION. ALT. #7: F3. REMOVE EXISTING BUILT-UP FLOORING SYSTEMS. PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB AND FINISH AS SCHEDULED. C1 C1 F4 I. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS SHOWN BASED UPON OWNER FURNISHED PLANS, OWNER FURNISHED SURVEYS, AND ONSITE OBSERVATIONS. DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS WILL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER/PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH WORK. ALT. #4A: F2. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISH AND BASE. (REF. FINISH LEGEND ON A1 SHEETS FOR FLOOR FINISHES NOTED THIS SHEET.) FILL ANY BLEMISHES IN EXISTING FLOOR WITH FLOOR TOPPING. PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH AS SCHEDULED. C1 P2 D2 1.56 OFFICE NOTES BY SYMBOL 1.12 MUSIC ROOM 1.09 BOYS W1 C1 F4 D4 D2 D2 D2 1.05 STORAGE W. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE REMOVAL OF ALL TECHNOLOGY AND COMMUNICATION DEVICES INCLUDING INTERCOM SPEAKERS, CLOCKS, WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS, CAFETERIA SPEAKERS, PROJECTORS, PROJECTOR PLATES, AUDIO-VIDEO CABLING, INTELLIGENT BOARDS, SCREENS, ETC WITH THE SOUND, INTERCOM AND TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTORS. THIS WORK MUST BE DONE PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF CEILING TILE OR OTHER CEILING AND PLENUM WORK. X. ALL TECHNOLOGY AND LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING IN THE PLENUM SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE. ANY DAMAGE TO THIS CABLING SHALL HAVE NEW CABLING PLACED BY THE PROPER TRADE CONTRACTOR AT THE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR THAT DAMAGED THE CABLING. ALL CABLES HAVE BEEN TESTED PRIOR TO RENOVATION WORK AND ALL WILL BE TESTED AFTER THE WORK IS COMPLETED. W4 F2 P2 D2 ADDENDUM 1 ADDENDUM 2 1.35 GRADE 2 D. CONTRACTOR WILL COORDINATE EXACT SIZES AND LOCATIONS FOR MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS REQUIRED FOR NEW WORK WITH EACH RESPECTIVE TRADE. MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS M2 1.33 GRADE 2 D2. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR LEAF. (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL). PREPARE FOR NEW DOOR LEAF AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. REUSE EXISTING HARDWARE UNLES SPECIFIED OTHERWISE ON THE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE WITH DOOR SCHEDULE. Date 11/23/16 12/1/16 1 1 C. EXISTING DRAIN LINES SERVING THE EXISTING FACILITY WILL REMAIN FUNCTIONAL. ANY DISRUPTIONS REQUIRED FOR NEW TIE-INS DURING CONSTRUCTION MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE SCHOOL DISTRICT REPRESENTATIVE ASSIGNED TO THIS SPECIFIC PROJECT. Revision / 1 2 D4 D1. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND/OR WINDOW AND FRAME (SHOWN DASHED, TYPICAL). PATCH, REPAIR, AND CLEAN OPENING AND PREPARE TO INFILL OPENING AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. Project: 1 A. BIDDERS TO VISIT SITE AND BE FAMILIAR WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO EXISTING DIMENSIONS, EQUIPMENT, LOCATIONS, SIZES, QUANTITIES, AND MATERIALS. C1. REMOVE EXISTING CEILING GRID, TILE AND REMOVE ANY CEILING TRIM WHERE OCCURS. MECHANICAL GRILLES, LIGHTING, SPEAKERS, CABLING, FIRE ALARMS AND ANY OTHER DEVICES ABOVE THE CEILEING TO BE TEMPORARILY SUSPENDED FOR REINSTALLATION. PREPARE ADJACENT WALLS TO RECEIVE NEW CEILING AS SHOWN ON REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. REF. ELEC. AND MECH. DN C1 M1 DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES 2 1.02 STORAGE D2 D2 1.24 KINDERGARTEN C1 1.19 COORIDOR F4 M1 C1 C1 W2 C1 C1 DN P1 F4 W2 1.14 PRACT. C1 1.03 PLATFORM D2 F4 P1 M1 D2 1.04 RAMP 1.15 MUSIC OFFICE C1 D2 C1 1.01 STORAGE 1.16 STOR D2 D2 EXISTING PARTITION TO BE REMOVED. INCLUDING BASE, DOORS, WINDOWS, OUTLETS, SWITCHES, CHALK/TACK BOARDS, POWER POLES, WALL CAPS AND ANY ITEM ATTACHED TO OR ASSOCIATED WITH THE PARTITION. CONTRACTOR WILL VERIFY ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL & PLUMBING IN EXISTING WALLS & TERMINATE OR RELOCATE AS REQUIRED FOR CONTRACT WORK. PATCH, REPAIR & CLEAN ALL ADJACENT WALLS AND PREPARE TO RECEIVE NEW PARTITION WALLS AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C1 D2 EXISTING ITEM TO BE REMOVED AS NOTED. D2 C1 F4 C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:15 AM 1.21 TOILET F4 D1 EXISTING WALL / PARTITION TO REMAIN. D2 1.23 STOR EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN. C1 D1 W2 W2 M1 D2 DEMOLITION LEGEND P1 1.18 PRE-K 1.20 KINDERGARTEN C1 C1 F4 F4 M1 W1 1 AD1.1 D4 DEMOLITION PLAN - SECTION 1 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 N 2 1 DEMOLITION PLAN SECTION 1 PLAN 4 Job No. 1697-06-01 KEY PLAN - 1ST FLOOR Drawn By: CL N.T.S. Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. AD1.1 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. FIRE EXTINGUISHER - REF. SPEC. SECT. 10 4400. F.E.C. X1.34 P.S. PROJECTION SCREEN REF. TYP. DET. ON A8 SHEETS X' M.B. MARKERBOARD REF. TYP. DET. ON A8 SHEETS X' T.B. TACKBOARD REF. TYP. DET. ON A8 SHEETS ELECTRIC WATER COOLER - REF. PLUMBING PLAN. X1.53 1.35 GRADE 2 1.52 MECH. X1.54 1.53 MECH. 1.55 DRY 1.35 1.51 YARD EQ./MAINT. 1.01 DOOR ASSEMBLY NUMBER - REF. SCHEDULE ON A3 SHTS. FOR DESCRIPTION. 1.01 WINDOW ASSEMBLY NUMBER - REF. SCHEDULE ON A3 SHTS. FOR DESCRIPTION. RD-1 SPECIAL OPENING NUMBER (ROLLING DOOR) - REF. SCHEDULE ON A3 SHTS. FOR DESCRIPTION. A1.1 1 ELEVATION REFERENCE 1.55 1.54 PREP 1.51 1.50 TOILET ALT. #4 1.50 1.36 GRADE 2 1.32 GRADE 2 1.56 1 1.56 OFFICE A1.1 CALLOUT REFERENCE 1.61 KITCHEN SIM 1 WALL SECTION REFERENCE A101 1.49 LOCKERS STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN - REF. STRUCT. DRAWINGS. 1.62 1.32 1.36 1.57 COOLER 1.49 1.62 OFFICE REF STRUCT FOR REINF DETAILS 1.58 FREEZER 1.37 KINDERGARTEN O.H. 1.48 STORAGE A1.6 1.31 KINDERGARTEN 1.30 1.30 TLT 1.44 LOST & FOUND A1.6 1.38 7 1.38 TLT 1.29 STOR 1.44 PROVIDE 30" MIN FOR DRINK COOLER 1.48 1.63 1.28 SPEECH 1.27 TESTING 1.46 2. TRAYSLIDE TO BE MODIFIED/LOWERED TO 30" ABOVE FIN. FLOOR. 1.47 CORRIDOR 1.43 1.40 1.28 UP ALT. #4 1.41 4" MASONRY VENEER W/ CMU WALL BACKUP PROVIDE 2" AIR GAP AT EXTERIOR WALLS. REF. WALL SECTIONS AND EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR THICKNESS, MATERIAL TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION. X1.06A CMU PARTITION - REF. WALL SECTION OR PLAN DIMENSIONS AND NOTES FOR THICKNESS, TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION. 3. ANGLE IRON SUPPORT FOR TRAYSLIDE TO BE RE-WELDED TO COUNTER FRAME. 1.06 CAFETERIA 1.42 1.27 12 STANDARD CMU GROUND FACE CMU A1.6 NEW DRYWALL PARTITION EXISTING DRYWALL PARTITION UP 1.26 CORRIDOR NOTES: A1.6 1 1.11 28' - 9 1/8" 1.11 MECH. 1.12 MUSIC ROOM 4 7/8" 4 7/8" 1) ALL DRYWALL PARTITIONS ARE 5/8" GYP BD ON EACH SIDE OF 3-5/8" METAL STUDS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WHERE TUBE STEEL COLUMN IS BEING ENCASED, PARTITIONS ARE 5/8" GYP BD ON EACH SIDE OF 6" METAL STUDS. 1.10 15' - 10 1/8" 1.25 BOOKROOM CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILE (PARTITION TYPE VARIES) - REF ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE FOR TILE TYPES & HEIGHTS 2 1.25 APPLIES TO MASTER & SECTION PLANS 4" MASONRY VENEER W/ ICF WALL BACKUP PROVIDE 2" AIR GAP AT EXTERIOR WALLS. REF. WALL SECTIONS AND EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR THICKNESS, MATERIAL TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION. 1. KITCHEN EQUIPTMENT DEALER TO REWORK TRAYSLIDE AT COUNTER. ALT. #4 ALT. #4 & 4A 1.39 1.40 STOR FLOOR PLAN LEGEND REF. TYP. CONST. DTLS. ON A5 SHTS. FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 1.46 WOMEN 1.42 GIRLS ALT. #4 & 4A 1.59C 1.45 1 A4.6 1.41 BOYS 1.59B 1.64 1.45 MEN ALT. #4 1.39 TLT ALT. #4 1.60 HR A1.6 1.43 ARTROOM 1.37 PROVIDE 30" MIN FOR DRINK COOLER X1.47 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SHEETS FOR TYPICAL ITEMS NOTED: FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES - G2.1 TYPICAL FINISH DETAILS - A4 SHEETS TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS & MASONRY JOINT CONDITIONS - A9 SHEETS 1.59 DRESSING ALT. #4 1.60 3 ALT. #4 1.31 REF STRUCT FOR REINF DETAILS SERVING 1.59A 1.34 CORRIDOR 1.29 1.63 SERVING 1.10 GIRLS ALT. #4 & 4A 1.07 CORRIDOR 2) THE INSIDE OF DRYWALL CHASES NEED NOT BE GYP. BD. UNLESS THAT PORTION OF THE CHASE IS PART OF A FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY. X1.06B 1.08 ALCOVE 3) NON-LOAD-BEARING CMU PARTITIONS ARE 8" CMU UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALL THICKNESSES NOTED ON PLANS ARE NOMINAL. REF. WALL SECTIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THICKNESS AND MATERIALS. 1.09 BOYS ALT. #4 & 4A 1.09 4) REF. CODE ANALYSIS PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF SPECIAL PARTITIONS. REF. RELATED LEGEND AND TYP. WALL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR REQUIREMENTS. X1.07 1.04 1.05 STORAGE X1.12 5) SEE WALL SECTIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF EXTERIOR WALLS. 1.02 1.05 Project: 3 EXPANDED MTL LATH 12" LONG @ 16" O.C. VERT MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 1.33 ADDENDUM 1 ADDENDUM 2 X1.52 Date 11/23/16 12/1/16 X1.51 TYPICAL E.W.C. INSTALLATION: INSTALL TWO ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AS SPECIFIED AT EACH LOCATION (U.N.O.). MOUNT ONE (H.C. ON PLAN) AT ADA HEIGHT AND ONE AT STANDARD HEIGHT (REF. SPEC. SECTION 01 4100). REF. MEP DRAWINGS FOR TYP. UTILITY CONNECTIONS. IF CONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FROM MEP DRAWINGS, PROVIDE APPROPRIATE UTILITY CONNECTIONS FOR COMPLETE AND PROPER INSTALLATION TO NEAREST AVAILABLE UTILITIES (VERIFY). Revision / 1 2 1.33 GRADE 2 DN 1.02 STORAGE PARTITION LEGEND 2 1.19 COORIDOR 1.15 MUSIC OFFICE 1.13 1.14 PRACT. 7 1/4" 1.02B RISER 2) ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO FACE OF GYP. BD., MASONRY OR CONCRETE. 1.01 1.24 1.22 1.21 TOILET 1.23A 1.22 TOILET 1.21 1.16 1.17 TOILET A1.6 1) THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE COMPRISED OF BOTH THE DRAWINGS AND THE SPECIFICATIONS. 1.13 PRACT. DN 4 1.02B 3' - 4" 1.14 1.03 PLATFORM 1.01 STORAGE 9' - 4" 1.15 1.04 RAMP 6' - 6" 1.12 1.24 KINDERGARTEN NOTES: 3) SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS. 4) SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (A9 SHEETS) FOR ADDITIONAL MASONRY AND DRYWALL REQUIREMENTS. 1.16 STOR 5) SEE PLUMBING PLANS AND ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES. 1.17 1.18 1.23 STOR 6) REF. DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULES AND DETAILS FOR MASONRY ROUGH OPENING SIZES. 5 A1.6 7) VERIFY ALL MASONRY OPENINGS WITH MANUFACTURERS' PRODUCTS (E.G. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS, ELECTRICAL PANELS, ETC.). 1.23B 8) PROVIDE WD BLOCKING IN ALL GYP BD WALLS AS REQ'D AT LOCATIONS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO; HANDRAILS, TOILET ACCESSORIES, PROJECTORS, CASEWORK, TACK BD'S, MARKER BD'S, WALL STOPS & DOOR HOLDERS. C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:18 AM 1.20 9) REF. SHEET G2.1 FOR CODE ANALYSIS PLANS. 10) REF. A2 SHEETS FOR REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. 1.20 KINDERGARTEN 1.18 PRE-K 11) REF. A4 SHEETS FOR FLOOR PATTERN PLANS. 1 12) REQUIRED ROOM SIGNAGE AS SPECIFIED TO BE PROVIDED AT NEW ROOMS OR WHERE FUNCTION OR ACCESSIBILITY HAS CHANGED. GC TO COORDINATE WITH DISTRICT FOR NUBERING AND NAMING GENERAL FLOOR PLAN NOTES X1.19 3 1 A1.2 FLOOR PLAN - SECTION 1 1/8" = 1'-0" N PLAN 2 1 FLOOR PLAN - SECTION 1 Job No. 1697-06-01 4 KEY PLAN - 1ST FLOOR N.T.S. Drawn By: CL Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. A1.2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. A3 - DOOR ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE(v2014) AL - ALUMINUM AS SCHEDULED AND SPECIFIED 8" 1' - 0" 2' - 0" 3' - 2" 10" FL FLUSH DOOR NO GLAZING SD-TYPE A SLIDING COUNTER WINDOW NL NARROW LITE SF STORE FRONT WIDE STILE DOOR 2L TWO LITE LV LOUVER DOOR NO GLAZING DOOR CONFIGURATIONS WINDOW CONFIGURATIONS NOTE: D = SINGLE DOOR, DD = DOUBLE DOORS (PAIR), P = PARTIAL, S = SIDELIGHT, T = TRANSOM. COMBINATIONS OF THESE ARE USED BELOW TO DESCRIBE THE DOOR FRAME TYPES. FRAME WIDTH FRAME WIDTH DR. WIDTH DS , DDS FULL SIDELIGHT OFFSET Comments 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DOOR HEIGHT FRAME HEIGHT 2' - 0" 3' - 0" MULLIONS AS REQ'D 2' - 0" 3'-0" MAX. SDST, SDDST, SSDSST OR SSDDSST FULL SIDELIGHT SYMMETRICAL W/ TRANSOM DST, DDST, DSS OR DDSST FULL SIDELIGHT OFFSET W/ TRANSOM NOTE: OFFSET CONFIGURATIONS (E.G. "D-S" DOOR/SIDELITE) MAY OCCUR EITHER HAND; REFER TO FLOOR PLANS DOOR FRAME CONFIGURATIONS EXISTING DOOR WORK SCHEDULE DOOR HEIGHT 2' - 0" 3' - 0" MULLIONS AS REQ'D FRAME HEIGHT 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 3'-0" MAX. FRAME HEIGHT DOOR HEIGHT MULLIONS AS REQ'D 3' - 0" 2' - 0" FRAME HEIGHT DOOR HEIGHT 3'-0" MAX. D OR DD OR CO SIMPLE FRAME/CASED OPENING Mark EQ DR WIDTH DOOR WIDTH X1.06A X1.06B X1.12 X1.51 X1.52 X1.53 X1.54 X4.01 X4.03 X4.04 X4.07 X4.11 X4.15 X4.16 X4.21 DR. WIDTH 2' - 0" FRAME WIDTH FRAME WIDTH EQ DOOR ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE ALT. #5 DOORS & FRAMES ONLY DOOR ASSEMBLY MARK X1.07 X1.19 X1.34 X1.47 X2.16 X2.30 X2.32A X2.32B X2.37 X3.06 X3.16 X3.21 X3.22 X3.27 X3.46 FIRE RATE DOOR TYPE HM-2L HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L HM-2L (PR.) HM-NL HM-NL HM-NL HM-NL HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) HM-2L (PR.) DOOR DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT GLAZING 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" CTG 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT 3' - 0" 6' - 11" GIT TH. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes H.O. SEC. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FRAME TYPE HM-D-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-D-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-D-S-T HM-D-S-T HM-D-S-T HM-D-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T HM-S-DD-S-T Yes HM-S-DD-S-T Yes HM-S-DD-S-T Yes Yes FRAME DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT 6' - 0" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" 6' - 0" 9' - 0" 18' - 0" 9' - 0" 4' - 8" 9' - 0" 4' - 8" 9' - 0" 4' - 8" 9' - 0" 4' - 8" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" 12' - 0" 9' - 0" 12' - 0" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" 8' - 6" 9' - 0" GLAZING GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT GIT CTG GIT GIT HEAD T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D T.E.E.D 3/A3.2 T.E.E.D T.E.E.D JAMB T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. 2/A3.2 T.E.E.D. T.E.E.D. DETAILS AND NOTES JAMB SILL T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 2/A3.2 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 T.E.E.D 1,4/A3.2 NOTES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COMMENTS: • ALL DOOR AND FRAME SIZES TO BE FEILD VERIFIED. • IF ALTERNATE 5 IN NOT ACCEPTED THE DOOR ASSEMBLY NOTES STILL APPLY TO EXISTING DOORS. A3 - WINDOW ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE (V2014) C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:20 AM ASSEMBLY NUMBER FIRE RATE 215 WINDOW TYPE SD-TYPE A WINDOW DESCRIPTION FRAME WDTH FRAME HT 5' - 0" 4' - 6" BO FRAME 2' - 6" GLAZING LTSG SHADING DEVICES HEAD 6/A3.1 DETAILS AND NOTES JAMB JAMB SILL 6/A3.1 NOTES 1.02B 1.04 1.05 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23A 1.23B 1.24 1.25 1.27 1.28 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.33 1.35 1.36 1.37 1.38 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.42 1.43 1.44 1.45 1.46 1.48 1.49 1.50 1.51 1.55 1.56 1.59A 1.59B 1.59C 1.60 1.62 1.63 1.64 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.06A 2.06B 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 2.11 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20A 2.20B 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26A 2.26B 2.27 2.29 2.32A 2.32B 2.33A 2.33B 2.34 2.35 2.38 2.39 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04A 3.04B 3.05 3.07 3.08A 3.08B 3.09 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.19A 3.20 3.20A 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.36 3.37 3.38 3.39 3.40 3.41 3.42 3.43 3.44 3.45 3.47 3.48 3.49 3.50 3.51 3.52 3.53 3.54 3.55 3.56 3.57 3.59 HEAD T.E.M. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. JAMB T.E.M. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W.A. T.D.W.A. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. T.D.W. NOTES HM - HOLLOW METAL AS SCHEDULED AND SPECIFIED SC - SOLID CORE WOOD AS SCHEDULED AND SPECIFIED DOOR MATERIALS AL - ALUMINUM AS SCHEDULED AND SPECIFIED HM - HOLLOW METAL AS SCHEDULED AND SPECIFIED XHM - EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME MATERIALS CTG - CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS FRG - FIRE RATED GLASS GIT - GREY INSULATED TEMPERED GLASS ISG - INSULATED SPANDREL GLASS LTSG - LAMINATED TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS ADDENDUM 2 4" 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 4" 8" 3' - 6" 2' - 6" 4' - 4 1/2" 4' - 0" EQ. EQ. FLR. LEVEL 2' - 8" 1' - 0" 4" 2-PEEP HOLES PER SCHED, TYP KITCHEN BACK DOOR 2 4" GLAZING ----------------------------------------------------CTG CTG --------------LTSG ------------CTG ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1.) ALL GLAZING IS 1/4" THICK (U.N.O.). INSULATED GLASS SHALL CONSIST OF AN EXTERIOR LAYER OF GLASS, TINTED AS SPECIFIED, AN INTERIOR LAYER OF CLEAR GLASS, FACTORY SEALED WITH A 1/2" AIR SPACE. WHERE TEMPERED GLASS IS SPECIFIED, BOTH LAYERS OF INSULATED GLASS SHALL BE TEMPERED. 2.) ANY WINDOW OR GLAZING PANELS LOCATED AT A INTERSTITIAL SPACE OR NOT READILY VISIBLE SHALL HAVE SPANDREL GLASS INSTALLED, REGARDLESS OF ANY NOTATION ELSEWHERE. GLAZING LEGEND DEFAULT DOORS IF A DOOR ASSEMBLY APPEARS ON THE FLOOR PLANS BUT IS NOT IDENTIFIED BY A SCHEDULE NUMBER, THE DOOR SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID AS LISTED BELOW. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST CLARIFICATION FROM THE ARCHITECT TO DETERMINE WHAT THE ACTUAL DOOR AND FRAME TYPE AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS WILL BE. ADJUSTMENTS IN CONTRACT PRICE WILL BE BASED ON THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ACTUAL REQUIREMENTS AND THE DEFAULT DOOR VALUE. THE DEFAULT EXTERIOR DOOR SHALL BE A TYPE "HM-FL" (SINGLE OR PAIR PER PLAN) IN A TYPE "HM-D" FRAME WITH DEFAULT HARDWARE PER SPECIFICATIONS AND FRAME DETAILING PER TYPICAL DETAILS FOR EXTERIOR DOORS. THE DEFAULT INTERIOR DOOR SHALL BE A TYPE "SC-FL" (SINGLE OR PAIR PER PLAN) IN A TYPE "HM-D" FRAME WITH DEFAULT HARDWARE PER SPECIFICATIONS AND FRAME DETAILING PER TYPICAL DETAILS FOR INTERIOR DOORS. MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 8" H.O. SEC. FRAME TYPE XHM-D XHM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D HM-D XHM-D HM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D Yes XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D-S XHM-D-S XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D Yes XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D Yes XHM-D Yes AL-S-DD-S XHM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D Yes XHM-D Yes XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D HM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D HM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D HM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D Yes XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D XHM-D DETAILS AND NOTES JAMB SILL 8 8 T.E.M. T.E.M. 8 8 8 8 8 4, 8, 9 4, 8 4, 8 5, 8 8 8 8, 9 8, 9 T.D.W. NEW 8 T.D.W. NEW T.D.W. NEW 8, 9 8 8, 9 8, 9 8 8 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 T.D.W. NEW 8 8 8 8 8, 9 1, 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1, 8 8 8 1, 8 T.D.W.A. 5/A3.2 NEW, 1 8 T.D.W. NEW 8 8 8 8 8 8, 9 8 8 8 8 8 8, 9 5, 8, 9 5, 8, 9 1, 8 1, 8 8 8 8, 9 8 8, 9 T.D.W. NEW T.D.W. NEW 8 8 8, 9 8, 9 8 8 T.D.W. NEW T.D.W. NEW 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8 8 8, 9 T.D.W. NEW 8, 9 8 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8 8 8 8 8 8, 9 8 8 8, 9 1, 8, 9 8 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8, 9 Date 12/1/16 8" 4" 4" 8" TH. FRAME DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 5' - 4" 7' - 2" 5' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 2' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 18' - 0" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 0" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" 3' - 4" 7' - 2" Revision / 2 6" 4" DOOR TYPE SC-FL SC-FL HM-FL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL HM-FL HM-FL HM-FL HM-FL SC-NL HM-FL HM-FL HM-FL HM-FL SC-NL HM-2L HM-2L SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL AL-SF (PR) SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-LV SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-NL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-FL SC-NL SC-FL SC-NL DOOR DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT GLAZING 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -2' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" LTSG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" LTSG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" LTSG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" --3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 2' - 8" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG 3' - 0" 7' - 0" -3' - 0" 7' - 0" CTG TYPICAL NOTES A) DOOR AND FRAME TYPES ARE INDICATED AS A MATERIALCONFIGURATION CODE. THE MATERIAL CODE DESIGNATES MATERIALS AND FINISHES AS SPECIFIED. REFER TO SPECIAL NOTES FOR NON-TYPICAL FINISHES. THE CONFIGURATION CODE REFERS TO TYPICAL OR SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS AS DRAWN. B) DOOR ASSEMBLIES ARE NUMBERED BY ASSEMBLY. MULTIPLE SETS OF DOORS MAY OCCUR IN THE SAME FRAME ASSEMBLY (REFER TO SCHEDULE AND PLAN FOR QUANTITY). DOORS MAY OCCUR IN PAIRS (REFER TO SCHEDULE AND PLAN FOR INCIDENCE). C) FRAME CONFIGURATION IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND NOMINAL. DIMENSIONS SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO ACCOMMODATE DOOR SIZES AS SCHEDULED. WITHIN ANY ASSEMBLY, THE WIDTH OF SIDELITES SHALL BE EQUAL AND SHALL NOT EXCEED 3'-0" U.N.O. D) ALTERNATE FINISHES CAN SOMETIMES HAVE AN IMPACT ON DETAILING (E.G. HALF OR OFFSET SADDLES EMPLOYED IN LIEU OF STANDARD SADDLES WHEN ADJACENT TO THICKER FLOOR FINISHES SUCH AS TERRAZZO OR QUARRY TILE). COORDINATE DETAILS WITH FINAL FINISH SELECTIONS. E) GLAZED FRAMES ASSOCIATED WITH 20-MINUTE OR 45-MINUTE FIRE-RATED DOORS SHALL BE RATED 1-HOUR. GLAZED FRAMES ASSOCIATED WITH 90-MINUTE FIRE-RATED DOORS SHALL BE RATED 2-HOUR. GLAZING MUST MEET CODE REQUIREMENTS, INCLUDING SIZE LIMITATIONS, IN FIRE-RATED FRAMES. F) PROVIDE 2x BLOCKING @ MTL STUD WALLS FOR WALL MOUNTED ITEMS LIKE; WALL STOPS, HOLD OPENS ETC. SPECIAL NOTES: 1. PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL - REF ELEC AND TECH. SHEETS 2. PROVIDE MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN - REF ELEC SHEETS 3. PROVIDE MANUAL HOLD OPEN 4. PROVIDE SOUND CONTROL ASSEMBLY 5. PROVIDE SOUND RETARDANT DOOR 6. DOOR & FRAME PROVIDED AS PART OF VIRTUAL PRACTICE RM 7. PROVIDE BLINDS 8. EXISTING DOOR OPENING, PROVIDE NEW LEAF. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SIZE. 9. PROVIDE NEW INTRUDER FUNCTION DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ASSEMBLY NOTES TEM - TYP EXT MASONRY DETAIL - HM TEMA- TYP EXT MASONRY DETAIL - ALUM TICF - TYP EXT INSUL CONC FORMS - HM TICFA - TYP EXT INSUL CONC FORMS - ALUM TIM - TYP INTERIOR MASONRY DETAIL - HM TIMA - TYP INTERIOR MASONRY DETAIL - ALUM TDW - TYP DRYWALL PARTITION DETAIL - HM TDWA- TYP DRYWALL PARTITION DETAIL - ALUM HO - DOOR HOLD OPEN (MAGNETIC OR MANUAL - SEE SPECIAL NOTES FOR MORE INFO) TH - THRESHOLD SEC - SECURITY CONTACTS (REF. ELEC. AND TECH.) Project: DOOR ASSEMBLY REV MARK FIRE RATE 1.01 2 1.02 SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS DOOR SCHEDULE AND CONFIGURATIONS Job No. 1697-06-01 Drawn By: CL Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. A3.1 ADDENDUM 2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. 4 1/2" Date 12/1/16 GLAZING AS SCHED. ALUM. FRAME AS SCHED. ALUMINUM SUB-SILL (.090) SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC (NOT REQUIRED FOR FRAMES INSIDE BLDG.) FLOOR FIN. AS SCHED. Revision / 2 F.F. SLOPE @ EXT. ONLY SEALANT EA. SIDE SHIM AS REQ'D. DOOR AND WINDOW DETAIL - SILL A3.2 3" = 1'-0" MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 5 DOOR AS SCHED. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL ALUM. FRAMES IN DRYWALL SHALL CONFORM TO THESE DETAILS DOOR BOT. SEAL. 1/2" MAX. 1/2" MAX. THICK FLOOR FINISH ( Q.T. TERRAZZO, WALK-OFF MAT OR OTHER ) S.S. ANCHOR @ 8" O.C. VERIFY WALL THICKNESS TO DETERMINE FRAME SIZES. 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EA. SIDE OF 3-5/8" MTL. STUDS PROVIDE 3 MTL STUDS AT EACH JAMB TYP DOOR/WDW HEAD DETAIL TYP. FOR ALUM OR HOLLOW METAL 4 A3.2 CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE ALUM. FRAME W/ SC DOOR AS SCHED. WHERE DIFFERENCE IN THICKNESS OF FLOOR FINISHES ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE THRESHOLD EXCEEDS 1/4" PROVIDE HALF SADDLE. ALUMINUM THRESHOLD (SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC) COMPRESSED FOAM ROD W/ CONT. BED OF SEALANT TYP DOOR/WDW JAMB DETAIL ALTERNATE THRESHOLD ALUM. FRAME TYP THRESHOLDS 6" = 1'-0" CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE PROVIDE 3 MTL STUDS AT EACH JAMB 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EA. SIDE OF 3-5/8" MTL. STUDS TYP WINDOW SILL DETAIL STL. BRACING - REF. STRUCT. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL H.M. FRAMES IN EXTERIOR MASONRY SHALL CONFORM TO THESE DETAILS ASPHALT MASTIC TERMINATOR STL. ANGLE - REF. STRUCT. (2) 2x BLOCKING CONT 5/8" GYP BD ON SUSP SYS 2 TYPICAL DRYWALL ALUM DETAILS (T.D.W.A.) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL H.M. FRAMES IN DRYWALL SHALL CONFORM TO THESE DETAILS SCALE 1-1/2" = 1'-0 VERIFY WALL THICKNESS TO DETERMINE FRAME SIZES. WEATHER BARRIER CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU) - VERIFY DIM. PER PLAN 5/8" GYP BD ON SUSP SYS CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE PROVIDE DRYWALL ANCHOR WHEN RECOMMENDED BY MFR TERMINATION BAR SELF-ADH. FLASHING. FORM END DAMS. MORTAR DROPPING COLLECTION SYSTEM FACE BRICK OR ACMU AT HEAD TO BE RUNNING BOND, SOLDIER, OR AS NOTED ON ELEV. AND DTLS. WEEPS @ 2'-0" O.C. TYP. PROVIDE 2 WEEPS PER OPENING MINIMUM. 8 3/4" U.N.O. A3.2 SELF-ADH. FLASHING 1 1/2" = 1'-0" WALL LINE - REF. PLAN NOTE: PART NO'S REFER TO PRODUCTS OF: C.R. LAURENCE CO. INC. (800) 421-6144 2503 E. VERNON AVE. LOS ANGLES, CA 90058-1897 WWW.CRLAURENCE.COM TYP. DOOR/WDW HEAD DETAIL TYP. DOOR/WDW JAMB DETAIL 2X WOOD BLOCKING WHERE ALUM. FRAME OCCURS - REF. PLAN PLATE THICKNESS NOTE: D1018A - CRL PASS-THRU WINDOW MODEL. REF SPEC SECTION 085113 D802C - CHROME SLIDING GLASS DOOR LOCK 5/8" GYP BD ON EA SIDE MTL STUD WALL 1/8" DRIP FLASHING DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. GLAZING AS SCHED. ONE OR TWO LAYERS OF GYP. BD. EA. SIDE OF MTL. STUDS IFIED. FILL SOLID W/ GROUT OVERHEAD ALUM WINDOW TRACK D7 SEALANT EA SIDE 1/2" H.M. FRAME. 1/4" BAR STOCK 1" TYP. WINDOW SILL DETAIL JAMB FRAME BEYOND D606 MASONRY TEE ANCHOR - 3 PER JAMB A3.2 CONT. INSUL. BD. WEATHER BARRIER 3" = 1'-0" VERIFY WALL THICKNESS TO DETERMINE FRAME SIZES. FIXED WINDOW REF. STRUCT. FOR REINF. FILL COLLAR JOINT W/ MORTAR SPRING-LOADED GUIDE EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION GLAZING AS SCHED. 1/4" BAR STOCK CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE HOLLOW METAL SUB-SILL (.090) SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC. (AT EXTERIOR ONLY) 1 1/2" JAMB ANCHOR (3 PER JAMB) PLYWD COUNTER CONT. SEALANT - EA. SIDE FLOOR FIN. AS SCHED. 2x BLOCKING F.F. TYP. EXT. MAS. DOOR JAMB DETAIL 5/8" GYP BD ON EA SIDE MTL STUD WALL A3.2 HEAD / SILL DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" 1 A3.2 VOLUME Job No. 1697-06-01 TYP. DOOR/WDW JAMB DETAIL Drawn By: Author SHIM AS REQ'D. DOOR AND WINDOW DETAIL - SILL 3" = 1'-0" FRAME DEPTH = W.T. + 1 1/8" TYP. DOOR/WDW HEAD DETAIL SCALE 1-1/2" = 1'-0 6 H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS SLOPE @ EXT. ONLY SEALANT AS SPEC'D., EA. SIDE BACKER ROD BACKER ROD & SEALANT H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. 1/4" 2" PROVIDE 3 JAMB ANCHORS @ EA JAMB. STL. CRUSH SLEEVE AT EACH ANCHOR H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. - FILL SOLID W/MORTAR TYPICAL EXTERIOR MASONRY DETAILS (T.E.M.) EXPANSION ANCHOR @ 1'-4" O.C. COUNTERSINK, FILL AND GRIND SMOOTH AND FLUSH. SCREW APPLIED STL. STOP 1 1/2" FACE BRICK OR CMU - REF. FLOOR PLAN SCALE 1-1/2" = 1'-0 GLAZING SLIDING WINDOW FRAME CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU) - VERIFY DIM. PER PLAN TYPICAL DRYWALL DETAILS (T.D.W.) DOOR AND WINDOW DETAIL - JAMB 2" C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:22 AM SEALANT AS SPEC'D, CONT. EA. SIDE SCREW APPLIED STL. STOP 2 1 1/2" = 1'-0" H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. FRAME DEPTH = W.T. + 1 1/8" 2" A3.2 CONT. SEALANT AT CERAMIC TILE 3 1/2" BATT INSUL. CONT. SEALANT T.E.M. PROVIDE 3 MTL STUDS AT EACH JAMB PROVIDE 3 JAMB ANCHORS @ EA JAMB. H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. 4" TYP @ DRS 2" TYP @ WDWS & TRANSOMS 8 3/4" TYP. EXT. MAS. DOOR HEAD DETAIL 7 CERAMIC TILE WHEN IT OCCURS HM FRAME AS SCHED CONT. SEALANT EA. SIDE 1" 3 1/2" BATT INSUL. HEAD DETAIL - GYP BD / GYP BD H.M. FRAME AS SCHED. FILL SOLID W/ MORTAR. WRAP STL. LINEL W/ METAL FLASHING. FORM 1/2" DRIP EDGE AS DETAILED. ONE OR TWO LAYERS OF GYP. BD. EA. SIDE OF MTL. STUDS 2" 3 LINTEL AS SCHED. - REF. STRUCT. ONE OR TWO LAYERS OF GYP. BD. EA. SIDE OF MTL. STUDS Project: W.T. CONT. INSUL. BD. TYPICAL EXISTING EXTERIOR DETAILS (T.E.E.D.) SCALE 1-1/2" = 1'-0 Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. A3.2 Revision / 1 2 Date 11/23/16 12/1/16 ADDENDUM 1 ADDENDUM 2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. 2 1' - 0" 7 6' - 0" 1' - 0" A9.1 SLOPE DECK TOWARD INTERNAL GUTTERS IN INTERMEDIATE BEAMS 8 / A9.1 SAW CUT EXISTING MASONRY 3/4" IN ORDER TO INSTALL MASONRY REGLET. FRICTION FIT REGLET & CAULK W/ SEALANT. 24 GA. PRE-FIN. MTL. COUNTERFLASHING PRE-MANUFACTURED CANOPY 24 GA. PRE-FIN. MTL. COUNTERFLASHING PRE-FIN. MTL. FLASHING 9' - 0" +/- PRE-FIN. MTL. FLASHING REMOVE EXISTING METAL DECK CANOPY AND REPLACE WITH NEW NOTE: ALL REGLETS & FLASHING BY PRE-MANUF. CANOPY CONTRACTOR. 1/2" PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT W/ 1/2" X 1" SEALANT EXISTING STRUCTURE AROUND ENTIRE DECK PERIMETER DRAINAGE HOLE FOR INTERNAL DOWNSPOUT CONC SIDEWALK - REF CIVIL GROUT FILL COLUMN AND SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE 1" PRE-MANUFACTURED CANOPY TRIM AROUND ENTIRE DECK PERIMETER 7 3" = 1'-0" A9.1 FLASHING DETAIL - NEW CANOPY 3 3" = 1'-0" A9.1 PRE-MANUFAUCTURED CANOPY SECTION 1/2" = 1'-0" Project: A9.1 FLASHING DETAIL - EXISTING CANOPY SIZE COLUMN BASE PER-MANUFACTURER PRE-MANUFACTURED CANOPY 1" 8 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS SAW CUT EXISTING MASONRY 3/4" IN ORDER TO INSTALL MASONRY REGLET. FRICTION FIT REGLET & CAULK W/ SEALANT. 1" BOTTOM OF FLOOR SLAB OR MTL. DECK DEFLECTION HEAD TRACK W/ 2" MIN. LEGS. DO NOT SCREW STUDS OR WALL BOARD TO DEFLECTION TRACK. TOP OF STUD (BEYOND) 1" BELOW BOTTOM OF HEAD TRACK SOUND BATT INSUL. FULL HEIGHT OF PARTITION MTL. STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. (REF. PLAN FOR SIZE) 6 A9.1 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT EACH SIDE. SOUND PARTITION CONNECTION OF WALL PERPENDICULAR TO DECK DEFLECTION HEAD TRACK W/ 2" MIN. LEGS. DO NOT SCREW STUDS OR WALL BOARD TO DEFLECTION TRACK. TOP OF STUD (BEYOND) 1" BELOW BOTTOM OF HEAD TRACK SOUND BATT INSUL. FULL HEIGHT OF PARTITION MTL. STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. (REF. PLAN FOR SIZE) 5 3" = 1'-0" 1" BOTTOM OF FLOOR SLAB OR MTL. DECK FILL ALL FLUTES W/ SOUND BATTS A9.1 SOUND PARTITION CONNECTION OF WALL PARALLEL TO DECK 3" = 1'-0" LAV. - REF PLUMBING PLAN REF. SPEC. SECTION 01 4100 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. 20 GA. BOTTOM TRACK 18" BASE AS SCHED. FLOORING AS SCHED. 1'-0" 42" MIN. (CRITICAL) 60" MIN. CONC. SLAB - REF. STRUCT. 4 A9.1 TYP. SECTION @ INTERIOR DRYWALL PARTITION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6" MAX. (CRITICAL) SOUND BATT INSUL. REF. FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION. 36" MIN. 1'-6" MIN. CRITICAL DOOR AS SCHED. MTL. STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. (REF. PLAN FOR SIZE) 60" MIN. HEIGHT VARIES - REF. RCP CEILING AS SCHED. 60" MIN. SOUND BATT INSUL. 2'-0" WIDE EACH SIDE OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS. 12" CRITICAL CLEAR INSIDE 2 A9.1 TYPICAL DOOR LOCATION PLAN 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 A9.1 DET. FOR STANDARD W.C. & LAV. LOCATION 1/2" = 1'-0" (CLEAR INSIDE) 1'-0" 20 GA. TOP TRACK FACE OF LAV. CANNOT ENCROACH 5'-0" CLEAR SPACE OF WATER CLOSET 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EA. SIDE OF MTL. STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. (REF. PLAN FOR SIZE) @ TILE C:\Users\cmason\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_ARCH_cmason.rvt 12/1/2016 7:40:24 AM BRACING AS REQ'D. - REF. STRUCT. 15 1/2" 1 W.C. - REF PLUMBING PLAN REF. SPEC. SECTION 01 4100 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. - W.C. MUST BE 1'-4" MIN. TO 1'-6" MAX. FROM ADJACENT FINISH WALL (CRITICAL) NOTE: FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE MOUNTED TO THE WIDE SIDE OF THE TOILET STALL. GRAB BAR REF. SPEC. SECTION 01 4100 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. MISC. DETAILS Job No. 1697-06-01 Drawn By: CL Date: 11.18.16 Sheet No. A9.1 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES: 1.FIELD VERIFY AS NECESSARY THE EXACT LOCATION, SIZE, DEPTH BELOW FLOOR/HEIGHT ABOVE CEILING, ROUTING, DIRECTION OF FLOW, CAPACITY, PIPE MATERIAL, AND CONDITION OF EXISTING PIPING. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 2.COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS AND TO MINIMIZE INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES. 3.THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF NEW FIXTURES AND THE PROPER CONTINUED OPERATION OF EXISTING BUILDING FIXTURES TO REMAIN SHALL GOVERN THE EXTENT AND NATURE OF WORK. GRADE 2 1.33 4.EXISTING WATER, WASTE, AND VENT MAINS ARE TO BE UTILIZED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES. REFER TO PLUMBING FLOOR PLANS FOR POINTS OF CONNECTION. 5.AT POINTS OF CONNECTION TO EXISTING, MODIFY/REPLACE EXISTING PIPING AS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER CONNECTIONS. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPE SIZES AND ONLY CONNECT NEW LINES TO EXISTING LINES OF EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. GRADE 2 1.35 ADDENDUM #2 6.PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE NEW COPPER PIPING IS CONNECTED TO EXISTING GALVANIZED PIPING. 7.SAWCUT/COREDRILL AND REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE NEW FIXTURES, CLEANOUTS, AND UNDER-FLOOR WATER, WASTE AND VENT PIPING. PATCH AND REFINISH FLOOR TO MATCH EXISTING. 9.COORDINATE ROUTING OF PIPING IN CEILING SPACES WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND CONDUIT. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO INSTALLING AN ALTERNATE PIPING PLAN. GRADE 2 1.32 6 10.COORDINATE ROUTING OF PIPING BELOW SLAB ON GRADE WITH COLUMN FOOTINGS, GRADE BEAMS, UNDERGROUND PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL UTILITIES, AND ANY OTHER SUB-SURFACE BUILDING ELEMENTS. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. GRADE 2 1.36 KITCHEN 1.61 11.COORDINATE ALL FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH LATEST ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS PRIOR TO ANY ROUGH-INS. COOLER 1.57 12.DO NOT ROUGH-IN FROM THESE DRAWINGS. REFER TO LATEST ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONED LOCATIONS. 13.ALL WORK, METHODS AND INSTALLATIONS INVOLVED IN THE PLUMBING DESIGN SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PREVAILING BUILDING CODE AND INSPECTION REGULATIONS AND ALL OTHER OFFICIALS HAVING JURISDICTION. OFFICE 1.62 KINDERGARTEN 1.31 PREP 1.54 STORAGE 1.48 KINDERGARTEN 1.37 SERVING 1.63 14.SITE INSPECTION: CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE OF WORK PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF HIS BID AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE WORKING CONDITIONS AND EXACT NATURE OF WORK. SUBMISSION OF A BID ACKNOWLEDGES FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR FURNISHING A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM. NO CHANGES IN CONTRACT WILL BE MADE TO ACCOMMODATE OR ALLOW EXTRA FUNDS FOR ANY OMISSION WHICH RESULTS FROM A FAILURE TO MAKE SUCH A THOROUGH EXAMINATION. ALL EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN OR TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON FINISHED FLOOR PLAN FOR GRAPHICAL CLARITY. FREEZER 1.58 DRESSING 1.59 SERVING ? 15.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ARRANGEMENTS IN ADVANCE WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO ANY NECESSARY SHUT DOWN OF THE DOMESTIC WATER OR ANY OTHER SERVICE. SUCH SHUT DOWN SHALL BE AT A TIME AND FOR A DURATION SATISFACTORY TO THE OWNER, WHO SHALL MAKE THE FINAL DETERMINATION AS TO ITS ACCEPTABILITY. 8 7 8 4"FD-1 TP-1 WC-2 L-2 3 1 2 1 6 9 TESTING 1.27 HB-1 3/4" 1 1/2" 11 BOYS 1.41 5 6 6 7 5 7 7 ARTROOM 1.43 1 5 GIRLS 5 7 1.42 6 8 6 8 10 # PLUMBING KEYED NOTES: 1 CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT NEW PLUMBING UTILITIES TO EXISTING MAINS IN CORRIDOR; FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. SIZE AS NOTED. 2 CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ROUTING OF NEW SANITARY WASTE LINES TO RECONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION IN CRAWL SPACE AREA. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXACT LOCATION. NO SAW CUTTING ALLOW ON CONCRETE PLANKS. COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL. 3 HOT AND COLD WATER DROP IN PLUMBING CHASE; SIZES AS SHOWN ON PLANS. 4 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW SHOWER SH-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 5 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW WATER CLOSET WC-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 6 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW WATER CLOSET WC-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 7 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW LAVATORY L-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 8 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW LAVATORY L-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 9 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW URINAL U-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. CAFETERIA 1.06 10 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EDF-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. DN 11 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW URINAL U-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 12 PROVIDE 6" FIRE PROTECTION WATER SERVICE ENTRY UP FROM BELOW SLAB. PROVIDE NEW AUTOMATIC WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER RISERS COMPLETE WITH ALARM CHECK VALVES AND TRIM. ROUTE ASSOCIATED DRAIN LINE WATERTIGHT THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL TO OUTDOORS AND TERMINATE WITH ELBOW DOWN. 13 REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF BUILDING FIRE PROTECTION WATER SERVICE ON SITE. BACKFLOW PREVENTER, POST INDICATOR VALVE, AND FREESTANDING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION TO BE LOCATED ON SITE. 14 FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGN SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO PROVIDE 1-1/2" DROP IN WALL TO ANGLE VALVE WITH 1-1/2" HOSE CONNECTION, 100'-0" OF HOSE, AND APPROVED ADJUSTABLE FOG NOZZLE IN CLEARLY LABELED FLUSH MOUNTED CABINET. (TYPICAL 2). 15 RISE UP 6" FIRE SPRINKLE ENTRY AS TIGHT TO THE FACE WALL AS POSSIBLE. CORRIDOR 1.47 UP 10 4 10 BOOKROOM 1.25 6 5 8 10 5 8 10 11 10 8 10 9 MUSIC ROOM 1.12 CORRIDOR 1.07 8 MECH. 1.11 6 STORAGE 1.05 STORAGE 1.02 14 14 3 2 4" 2" 6' - 0" KINDERGARTEN 1.24 HB-1 L-2 STOR 1.23 TOILET 1.22 WCO 4" 2" 1.15 WC-2 1 1/4" 1/2" L-2 2 DN STOR 1.16 15 6" WC-2 1 1/4" 1/2" 1 1 1 WCO MUSIC OFFICE 4"FD-1 TP-1 12 RISER 1.02B 4" 2" 1 Project: WCO 7 SPEECH 1.28 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS LOCKERS 1.49 Revision / 1 8 2" Date 12/1/16 8.REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXISTING (NON-DEMISING) WALLS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE NEW FIXTURES, CARRIERS, CLEANOUTS, AND WATER, WASTE AND VENT PIPING. PATCH AND REFINISH WALLS TO MATCH EXISTING. PLUM 13 4"FD-1 TP-1 2" 3 L-2 HB-1 PRE−K 1.18 PLUMBING PLAN - SECTION 1 KINDERGARTEN 1.20 3 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 1 PLUMBING PLAN - SECTION 1 P2.1 1/8" = 1'-0" JG Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 DBR Project Number BM VOLUME BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. P2.1 1. CONTR STRUC 2. CONTR STRUC 3. CONTR PLUMB CHASE CONNE SCHED 4. ALL VE 5. ALL VE AIR INT Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES: 1.FIELD VERIFY AS NECESSARY THE EXACT LOCATION, SIZE, DEPTH BELOW FLOOR/HEIGHT ABOVE CEILING, ROUTING, DIRECTION OF FLOW, CAPACITY, PIPE MATERIAL, AND CONDITION OF EXISTING PIPING. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 2.COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS AND TO MINIMIZE INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES. 3.THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF NEW FIXTURES AND THE PROPER CONTINUED OPERATION OF EXISTING BUILDING FIXTURES TO REMAIN SHALL GOVERN THE EXTENT AND NATURE OF WORK. GRADE 5 3.26 GRADE 3 3.45 GRADE 5 3.28 4.EXISTING WATER, WASTE, AND VENT MAINS ARE TO BE UTILIZED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES. REFER TO PLUMBING FLOOR PLANS FOR POINTS OF CONNECTION. GRADE 3 3.47 5.AT POINTS OF CONNECTION TO EXISTING, MODIFY/REPLACE EXISTING PIPING AS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER CONNECTIONS. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPE SIZES AND ONLY CONNECT NEW LINES TO EXISTING LINES OF EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. ADDENDUM #2 6.PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE NEW COPPER PIPING IS CONNECTED TO EXISTING GALVANIZED PIPING. 7.SAWCUT/COREDRILL AND REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE NEW FIXTURES, CLEANOUTS, AND UNDER-FLOOR WATER, WASTE AND VENT PIPING. PATCH AND REFINISH FLOOR TO MATCH EXISTING. Date 12/1/16 8.REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXISTING (NON-DEMISING) WALLS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE NEW FIXTURES, CARRIERS, CLEANOUTS, AND WATER, WASTE AND VENT PIPING. PATCH AND REFINISH WALLS TO MATCH EXISTING. 9.COORDINATE ROUTING OF PIPING IN CEILING SPACES WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND CONDUIT. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO INSTALLING AN ALTERNATE PIPING PLAN. GRADE 5 3.29 GRADE 3 3.44 GRADE 3 3.48 Revision / 1 GRADE 5 3.25 10.COORDINATE ROUTING OF PIPING BELOW SLAB ON GRADE WITH COLUMN FOOTINGS, GRADE BEAMS, UNDERGROUND PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL UTILITIES, AND ANY OTHER SUB-SURFACE BUILDING ELEMENTS. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 11.COORDINATE ALL FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH LATEST ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS PRIOR TO ANY ROUGH-INS. 12.DO NOT ROUGH-IN FROM THESE DRAWINGS. REFER TO LATEST ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONED LOCATIONS. CORRIDOR 3.46 GRADE 4 3.24 GRADE 4 3.30 13.ALL WORK, METHODS AND INSTALLATIONS INVOLVED IN THE PLUMBING DESIGN SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PREVAILING BUILDING CODE AND INSPECTION REGULATIONS AND ALL OTHER OFFICIALS HAVING JURISDICTION. SCIENCE LAB 3.43 14.SITE INSPECTION: CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE OF WORK PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF HIS BID AND THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE WORKING CONDITIONS AND EXACT NATURE OF WORK. SUBMISSION OF A BID ACKNOWLEDGES FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR FURNISHING A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM. NO CHANGES IN CONTRACT WILL BE MADE TO ACCOMMODATE OR ALLOW EXTRA FUNDS FOR ANY OMISSION WHICH RESULTS FROM A FAILURE TO MAKE SUCH A THOROUGH EXAMINATION. ALL EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN OR TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON FINISHED FLOOR PLAN FOR GRAPHICAL CLARITY. COMP. LAB 3.49 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS CORRIDOR 3.27 15.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ARRANGEMENTS IN ADVANCE WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO ANY NECESSARY SHUT DOWN OF THE DOMESTIC WATER OR ANY OTHER SERVICE. SUCH SHUT DOWN SHALL BE AT A TIME AND FOR A DURATION SATISFACTORY TO THE OWNER, WHO SHALL MAKE THE FINAL DETERMINATION AS TO ITS ACCEPTABILITY. STOR 3.50 STOR 3.31 RESOURCE 3.37 E.S.L. 3.40 9 7 11 P.O. CLASSROOM 3.23 8 8 7 MECH 3.42 7 14 9 TLT 3.32 9 9 8 11 WRKRM 3.41 9 7 9 7 14 8 8 9 TLT 3.51 9 9 7 9 # STOR. STOR. 3.38 3.39 STOR 3.33 BOYS 3.34 GIRLS 3.36 ALCOVE 3.35 15 15 BOYS 3.53 STOR. 3.52 UP GIRLS 3.54 CORRIDOR 3.58 15 15 15 1 CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT NEW PLUMBING UTILITIES TO EXISTING MAINS IN CORRIDOR; FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION.SIZE AS NOTED. 2 CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ROUTING OF NEW SANITARY WASTE LINES TO RECONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION IN CRAWL SPACE AREA. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXACT LOCATION. COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL. 3 HOT AND COLD WATER DROP IN PLUMBING CHASE; SIZES AS SHOWN ON PLANS. 4 MODIFY AS REQUIRED AND CONNECT NEW COLD AND HOT WATER ABOVE CEILING TO EXISTING COLD AND HOT WATER OF EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. FIELD VERIFY. SIZE AS NOTED. 5 ALTERNATE #4: PROVIDE NEW SINK SK-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 6 MODIFY AS REQUIRED AND CONNECT NEW SANITARY WASTE BELOW GRADE TO EXISTING EXISTING SANITARY WASTE EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. FIELD VERIFY. SIZE AS NOTED. 7 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW WATER CLOSET WC-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 8 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW WATER CLOSET WC-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 9 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW LAVATORY L-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 10 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW LAVATORY L-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 11 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW URINAL U-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 12 NOT USED. 13 PROVIDE NEW SHOWER IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 14 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW URINAL U-2 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 15 ALTERNATE #4 : PROVIDE NEW ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EDF-1 IN SAME APPROXIMATE LOCATION AS OLD. CONNECT WASTE, VENT, AND WATER LINE TO PREVIOUSLY CAPPED LINES DURING DEMOLITION. MODIFY AS REQUIRED. 15 CORRIDOR 3.22 VEST 3.21 1 1 EXISTING FCO APPROXIMATE I.E=257.93' 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2 5 SK-1 PER EXISTING DRAWING. F.F.= 262.67 5 SK-1 LIFE SKILLS 3.20 RESOURCE 3.13 RESOURCE 3.12 GRADE 1 3.11 GRADE 1 3.05 4" 5 GRADE 4 3.14 SK-1 CORRIDOR 3.16 CORRIDOR 3.06 3 1-1/2" CW, 1/2" HW WC-2 HB-1 WC-2 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1/2" 1 2" 4 6 TOILET 3.18 SK-1 2" 1/2" 4 2" VTR 6 HB-1 4" LIFE SKILLS 3.19 1 13 4"FD-1 TP-1 GRADE 4 3.15 TOILET1 1/2" 3.10 1/2" 10 WCO HB-1 2" L-2 3 4"FD-1 TP-1 2"VTR STORAGE 3.17 TOILET 3.03 4" L-2 4" 1 1/2" TOILET 3.02 1/2" 4"FD-1 TP-1 2" 3 L-2 WC-2 4"FD-1 TP-1 GRADE 1 3.07 C:\Users\lyu\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_lyu.rvt 4"FCO 1 4" TOILET 3.09 WC-2 8 STOR 3.04 STOR 3.08 L-2 4" 3 2" 2" PLUMBING KEYED NOTES: 2"VTR HB-1 GRADE 1 3.01 Project: 8 PLUMBING PLAN - SECTION 3 1 PLUMBING PLAN - SECTION 3 P 2.3 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 JG Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 DBR Project Number BM VOLUME BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. P 2.3 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. e19 e20 e21 e22 e23 e24 e25 e26 e27 e28 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 1. REPLACE EXISTING BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO OWNER PREFERRED AUTOMATED LOGIC OR UNIFY RELIABLE CONTROLS. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF DDC PANELS AND CONTROLLERS. 2. ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED PRIOR TO ORDERING CONTROLLERS. ANY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT THAT REQUIRES BMS UPGRADES SHALL BE UPGRADED TO OPERATE NORMALLY WITH NEW BMS. eC eC 3. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY GRAPHICS, SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND ROUTERS TO MAKE EXISTING SYSTEMS OPERATE IN NORMAL FASHION. 4. FOR CONTINUATION OF GENERAL NOTES REFER TO SHEET M0.1 GENERAL NOTES. GRADE 2 1.33 MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES DOAU-6 eE'' eF GRADE 2 1.32 VD AHU-2 4 5 6 14"x14" 12"x10" eE 21 LOCKERS 1.49 21 12"x12" FCU 62 5 7 12 KITCHEN 1.61 TOILET 1.50 21 FCU 63 5 7 12 eI KINDERGARTEN 1.31 ACCU-2 21 8"x10" 8"x10" eL 21 20 21 FCU-MDF-1 18 ARTROOM 1.43 BOYS 1.41 15 5 7 12 eN CORRIDOR 1.47 FCU 77 5 7 12 15 10 OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK SHALL CONNECT TO EXISTING ROOF OPENING. PROVIDE DUCT WITH MOTORIZED DAMPER AND VOLUME DAMPER. 11 EXISTING O/A RISER AND DUCT CONNECTION SHALL BE RE-USED, PROVIDE NEW CONNECT AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN. TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO NEW DUCTWORK SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN, MATCH EXISTING DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION. 12 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM EXISTING UNIT TO FLOOR DRAIN. PROVIDE NEW INSULATED CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE TO MATCH EXISTING DRAIN LINE PER DIV.23 SPECIFICATIONS. FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZES AND LOCATION AT SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION AND DEMOLITION. RE:DETAIL 2 & 6/M4.1 13 HVAC SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 14 INSTALL NEW CEILING FAN WITH GRILLE KIT. CEILING FAN SHALL SWITCH ON/OFF WITH LIGHT SWITCH TO SERVES THE NEW RESTROOM. ROUTE 6" ROUND EXHAUST AIR DUCTWORK TO ROOF WITH ROOF CAP. INSTALL EXHAUST VENT 15'-0" FROM EXISTING OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES. RE:DETAIL 9/M4.1 15 PROVIDE SPIN-IN FITTING WITH LOCKING QUADRANT BUTTERFLY DAMPER FOR ALL ROUND DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR DUCT. RE:DETAIL 13/M4.1. 16 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING OUTSIDE AIR SECTION AND REPLACE WITH NEW DUCTWORK AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AT SITE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION AND INSTALLATION. 17 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING PNEUMATIC CONTROLS PANEL AND CONVERTER BOX FROM MECHANICAL ROOM, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AT SITE. ALL ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL AND HVAC ACCESSORIES FOR THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM SHALL BE DEMOLISHED, COORDINATE WITH ALL TRADES. FCU 75 5 7 12 6"ø 8"ø 21 21 18 PROVIDE CEILING MOUNTED CASSETTE FAN COIL UNIT AT APPROXIMATE LOCATION SHOWN. COORDINATE FINAL RCP LAYOUT WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. UNIT SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE UNIT WITH INTEGRAL CONDENSATE PUMP THAT ALARMS NEW BMS WHEN MALFUNCTIONS. RE:DETAIL 4/M4.1 19 NEW CONDENSING UNIT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION, PROVIDE 6" TALL CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD SIZE 4" LARGER THAN CONDENSING UNIT FINAL DIMENSIONS. RE:DETAIL 5/M4.1 20 ROUTE FULLY INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES THRU EXTERIOR WALL AND IN TO SPACE. EXTERIOR INSULATED LINES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ALUMINUM JACKETING PER DIV.23 SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR A VERTICAL CHASE TO ENCAPSULATE INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES. RE:DETAIL 3/M4.1 21 SUPPLY, RETURN AND EXHAUST AIR GRILLES SHALL BE TERMPORARILY UNINSTALLED WITH ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REMOVAL AND REINSTALLED WHEN NEW CEILING IS INSTALLED. PROVIDE TERMPORARY SUPPORTS TO SUSPEND DUCTWORK FROM STRUCTURE, FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS. TYPICAL ALL NEW CEILINGS. 22 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM CASSETTE UNT SHALL BE ROUTED ABOVE CEILING AND SLOPED AT 1/4" PER FOOT. CONNECT TO LAVATORY TAIL PIECE, COORDINATE WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FOR CONNECTION. 23 PROVIDE A 5KW ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER (EUH-1) IN FIRE RISER ROOM. MOUNT UNIT HEATER PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR POWER CONNECTION. UNIT HEATER SHALL BE REZNOR MODEL "EGEB" OR EQUAL 480V/3PH/60Hz, DRAW-THROUGH, WITH FACE DIFFUSERS, HIGH-LIMIT TEMP RESET, MFG. CONTROLS WITH SPACE TEMP. SENSOR. RE:DETAIL 1/M4.2. eM eN 8"ø FCU 66 5 7 12 PROVIDE NEW SLIP-IN ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER (EDH) IN OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK SECTION AS SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS. PROVIDE 1" PRE-FILTER SECTION WITH ACCESS 24" FROM INTAKE OF EDH. COORDINATE WITH EXISTING STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND REQ. CLEARANCES. RE:DETAIL 8/M4.1 FCU 76 21 eM 9 GIRLS 1.42 21 8"ø 21 PROVIDE NEW DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR UNIT (DOAU) AT APPROXIMATE LOCATION SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN. PROVIDE NECESSARY SUPPORTS AND VIBRATION ISOLATORS TO CONNECT TO EXISTING STRUCTURE. DOAU SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH COIL KIT AND SHALL CONNECT TO EXISTING MAIN CHILLED WATER LINES. PROVIDE FREEZE TAP WITH ISOLATION VALVES TO CONNECT NEW WATER LINE TO EXISTING WATER LINES, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF CHILLED WATER LINES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. RE:DETAIL 1, 2 & 6/M4.1 21 eL 5 7 12 8 eK 22 TEF-1 14 FCU 67 TESTING 1.27 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING FAN COIL UNIT WITH NEW UNIT AS SCHEDULED. PROVIDE NEW PIPING COIL KIT WITH ACTUATORS TO CONNECT TO NEW BMS. NEW UNIT SHALL CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK, PROVIDE NECESSARY TRANSITIONS AND FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO INSTALL UNIT PROPERLY. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FIELD VERIFY EXISTING LOCATIONS AND NECESSARY CLEARANCES PER MANUFACTURER. RE:DETAIL 1, 2 & 6/M4.1 eJ 6"ø SPEECH 1.28 21 DRESSING 1.59 SERVING ? 6"ø eK SERVING 1.63 8"x10" 21 7 21 19 12"x12" 21 FREEZER 1.58 PREP 1.54 STORAGE 1.48 KINDERGARTEN 1.37 FCU 64 5 7 12 EXISTING HOUSE KEEPING PAD SHALL BE RE-USED ONLY WHERE UNIT DIMENSION MATCHES EXISTING UNIT DIMENSIONS. IF EXISTING UNIT SIZE AND NEW UNIT SIZE DO NOT MATCH PROVIDE NEW 6" HIGH CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR DEMOLISHING EXISTING PAD AND POURING NEW PAD. eI OFFICE 1.62 TLT 1.30 6 eH 21 FCU 65 5 7 12 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING T-STAT THAT SERVES ASSOCIATED UNIT. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL NEW T-STAT IN THE SAME LOCATION OF THE EXISTING T-STAT. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AS SITE. COOLER 1.57 eH 21 5 13 21 GRADE 2 1.36 eJ PROVIDE SINGLE ZONE HORIZONTAL MOUNTED AND VERTICAL DISCHARGE AIR HANDLING UNIT TO SERVE EXISTING SPACES. EXTEND EXISTING CHILLED WATER LINES FROM ABOVE TO CONNECT TO NEW AHU, RE:MECHANICAL SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZES. CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE TO TERMINATE TO EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN IN ROOM. RE:DETAIL 1,2 & 14/M4.1 eF 21 12"x12" 4 AIR SEPERATOR eE'' 1 PROVIDE NEW VFD TO CONTROL ASSOCIATED CHILLED WATER PUMPS. COORDINATE POWER CONNECT AND FINAL MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH VFD AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL. 6"ø 21 (E) 44/16 15 21 (E) 46/18 13 13 BOOKROOM 1.25 2 17 FCU 69 21 5 7 FCU 68 EDH-DOAU-12 9 12 5 7 12 DOAU-12 eO e29 eO 8 AHU-3 4 5 6 16"x12" e29 21 10 11 CORRIDOR 1.07 21 MUSIC ROOM 1.12 MECH. 1.11 CAFETERIA 1.06 eP eP STORAGE 1.05 21 eQ KINDERGARTEN 1.24 eQ STORAGE 1.02 FCU 70 21 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 9 EDH-DOAU-6 P-1 VFD 3 MECH. 1.53 13 VD 15 16 1.52 ADDENDUM #2 eE 3 2 17 1 MECH. P-1 YARD EQ./MAINT. 1.51 8 APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF NEW DDC PANEL, CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. POWER REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. Project: 6"x10" 9 2 Date 12/1/16 EDH-DOAU-5 14"x14" GRADE 2 1.35 FCU 59 5 7 12 1 P-2 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING CHILLED WATER PUMPS, VALVES AND TEMP GAUGES. PROVIDE NEW DIGITAL SENSORS, ACTUATORS AND VALVES TO COMMUNICATE BACK TO NEW BMS. PUMPS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON NEW INERTIA CONCRETE PAD. RE:7/M4.1 AND 1/M5.3 Revision / 1 6"ø 1 eD 3 P-2 VFD 14"x14" 15 21 8"x6" 14"x14" eD FCU 55 5 7 12 6"ø FCU 58 5 7 12 21 I.S.S. 2.39 X 10 11 DOAU-5 10 11 5 7 12 1 eR 21 RISER 1.02B 21 FCU 71 5 7 12 T 21 eR 1 STOR 1.16 MUSIC OFFICE 1.15 TEF-1 eS 23 EUH-1 eS 21 14 eT eT TOILET 1.21 STOR 1.23 TOILET 1.22 TEF-1 14 eU 6"ø eU C:\Users\lyu\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_lyu.rvt 6"ø eV FCU 72 5 7 12 FCU 74 5 7 12 eV THESE DOCUMENTS WERE PREPARED BASED ON EXISTING DRAWINGS AND FIELD OBSERVATIONS. DBR ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS WAS NOT INVOLVED IN PREPARING THE ORIGINAL DESIGN DOCUMENTS SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER. 21 PRE−K 1.18 21 1 MECHANICAL PLAN - SECTION 1 6"ø KINDERGARTEN 1.20 M2.1 FCU 73 5 7 12 1/8" = 1'-0" MECHANICAL PLAN SECTION 1 21 3 eW 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 eW e19 e20 e21 e22 e23 e24 e25 e26 e27 e28 JG Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 DBR Project Number BM VOLUME BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. M2.1 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 1. REPLACE EXISTING BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO OWNER PREFERRED AUTOMATED LOGIC OR UNIFY RELIABLE CONTROLS. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF DDC PANELS AND CONTROLLERS. 2. ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED PRIOR TO ORDERING CONTROLLERS. ANY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT THAT REQUIRES BMS UPGRADES SHALL BE UPGRADED TO OPERATE NORMALLY WITH NEW BMS. 3. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY GRAPHICS, SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND ROUTERS TO MAKE EXISTING SYSTEMS OPERATE IN NORMAL FASHION. 1 2 4. FOR CONTINUATION OF GENERAL NOTES REFER TO SHEET M0.1 GENERAL NOTES. STOR 4.14 MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES 1 BOYS 4.18 STOR 4.15 MECH 4.16 STOR 4.17 STOR 4.20 STOR 4.13 COORIDOR 4.19 X EXISTING WINDOW UNIT SHOWN DASHED SHALL BE REPLACED. PROVIDE NEW WINDOW UNIT TO MATCH EXISTING WALL OPENING, UNIT CAPACITY, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AN AIR AND WATER TIGHT INSTALLATION. 2 WINDOW UNIT IS EXISTING TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE, COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECT AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR SEALING AROUND WINDOW AIR AND WATER TIGHT. LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS IS AN APPROXIMATE LOCATION FIELD VERIFY. 3 HVAC SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 1 ADDENDUM #2 1 Date 11/30/16 LOBBY 4.21 Revision / 1 3 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS GYMNASIUM 4.12 3 LOBBY 4.01 STOR 4.09 2 STOR 4.06 STOR 4.11 HOUSE KEEPING 4.22 STOR 4.07 MECH 4.04 STOR 4.08 OFFICE 4.03 GIRLS 4.02 TLT 4.10 TLT 4.05 1 2 Project: 1 1 1 GYMNASIUM C:\Users\jgarcia\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_jgarcia.rvt M2.4 1/8" = 1'-0" THESE DOCUMENTS WERE PREPARED BASED ON EXISTING DRAWINGS AND FIELD OBSERVATIONS. DBR ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS WAS NOT INVOLVED IN PREPARING THE ORIGINAL DESIGN DOCUMENTS SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER. MECHANICAL PLAN GYMNASIUM 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 DBR Project Number BM JG VOLUME Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. M2.4 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. FIRE ALARM GENERAL NOTES: eC eC A. ALL CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES SHALL BE CENTERED IN THE CEILING TILE. B. ALL FIRE ALARM VISUAL AND AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES SHALL BE CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE CANDELA RATINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ADA & NFPA COVERAGES. C. ALL VISUAL FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE 75 CD UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. D. ALL WIRING FOR DEVICES IN EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS SHALL BE ROUTED WITHIN CONDUIT. NO WIRING SHALL BE ROUTED EXPOSED. GRADE 2 1.33 1 eD 1 eD GRADE 2 1.35 1 1 DRY 1.55 MECH. 1.52 YARD EQ./MAINT. 1.51 1 1 eE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UNISTALL AND REINSTALL EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS REQUIRED DUE TO CEILING REPLACEMENT. FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE RE-INSTALLED AT SAME LOCATION. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REFLECTED PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK. 2 NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICE SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO TIE NEW DEVICES IN TO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 3 COORDINATE QUANTITY AND EXACT LOCATION OF FIRE ALARM FLOW SWITCH WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE RELAY TO SIGNAL MAIN FIRE ALARM PANEL. 4 COORDINATE QUANTITY AND EXACT LOCATION OF FIRE ALARM SUPERVISORY SWITCH WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE RELAY TO SIGNAL MAIN FIRE ALARM PANEL. 1 1 MECH. 1.53 1 1 ADDENDUM #2 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: eE PREP 1.54 eE'' eE'' eF GRADE 2 1.32 1 OFFICE 1 1.56 1 TOILET 1.50 1 Date 12/1/16 eF LOCKERS 1.49 GRADE 2 1.36 Revision / 1 1 1 KITCHEN 1.61 1 COOLER 1.57 1 eH eH 1 1 eI 1 eI OFFICE 1.62 FREEZER 1.58 KINDERGARTEN 1.31 STORAGE 1.48 KINDERGARTEN 1.37 2 eJ SERVING 1.63 1 TLT 1.30 1 1 DRESSING 1.59 SERVING ? eJ MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 eK 1 eK 1 eL eL 1 I.S.S. 2.39 1 ARTROOM 1 1.43 SPEECH 1.28 1 TESTING 1.27 1 1 BOYS 1.41 1 GIRLS 1 1.42 1 1 1 eM eM 1 1 CORRIDOR 1.47 eN 1 1 1 eN 1 eO eO CAFETERIA 1.06 BOOKROOM 1.25 1 1 e29 e29 1 1 1 1 MUSIC ROOM 1.12 MECH. 1.11 Project: 1 1 CORRIDOR 1.07 1 1 eP eP BOYS 1.09 1 STORAGE 1.05 STORAGE 1.02 eQ eQ 1 KINDERGARTEN 1.24 1 RISER 1.02B 1 1 1 eR eR SP W 4 1 2 2 eS 1 1 STOR 1.16 MUSIC OFFICE 1.15 1 3 eS 1 1 1 eT eT TOILET 1.21 STOR 1.23 TOILET 1.22 2 2 C:\Users\rflores\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_rflores.rvt eU FIRE ALARM NOTE TO CONTRACTOR 2 eU 1. CONTRACTOR TO REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK, WHICH MAY NOT BE REFLECTED ON THESE PLANS. AT ANY AREAS, THAT CONSIST OF CEILING REMOVAL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING FIRE ALARM DETECTION/NOTIFICATION DEVICES PRIOR TO CEILING REMOVAL. UPON REINSTALLATION OF THE CEILING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE DEVICES IN THE EXACT LOCATION THAT THEY EXISTED IN PREVIOUSLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT A COMPLETE SYSTEM TEST PRIOR TO AND UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTIONS. ANY DEVICES THAT ARE FOUND TO BE FUNCTIONING IMPROPERLY eV AND WERE NOT REPORTED TO BE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE PROJECT AND/OR THE OWNER. 1 eV 1 2 1 PRE−K 1.18 1 FIRE ALARM PLAN - SECTION 1 FA2.1 KINDERGARTEN 2 1.20 1/8" = 1'-0" FIRE ALARM PLAN SECTION 1 eW eW 3 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 DBR Project Number BM e19 e20 e21 e22 e23 e24 e25 e26 e27 e28 JG VOLUME Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. FA2.1 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. eC eC GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES A.- ALL CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES LOCATED IN LAY-IN CEILINGS SHALL BE CENTERED IN THE CEILING TILE. B.- CONTRACTOR SHALL INDICATE LIGHTING CIRCUIT CONTROLLED BY EACH SWITCH BY PROVIDING TYPE WRITTEN LABELING LOCATED ON INSIDE FACE OF EACH SWITCH COVER PLATE. C.- ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHOWN SHALL BE EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. D.- CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES ON EXISTING CEILING. ALL ABANDONED DEVICES IN CEILING SHALL BE REMOVED INCLUDING: CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS, SPEAKERS, AND FIRE ALARM DEVICES. E.- CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICES WITHIN SCOPE OF WORK. PROVIDE NEW DEVICES WHERE REQUIRED TO ENSURE VISUAL AND AUDIBILITY REQUIREMENTS PER ADA & NFPA. F.- ALL FIRE ALARM DEVICES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 'N' INDICATES NEW DEVICE. G.- CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL FIXTURES AND REPLACE ALL INOPERABLE LAMPS/BALLASTS WITHIN SCOPE OF WORK. GRADE 2 1.33 2 eD eD GRADE 2 1.35 2 DRY 1.55 2 2 MECH. 1.52 YARD EQ./MAINT. 1.51 2 MECH. 1.53 eE eE PREP 1.54 2 eE'' ADDENDUM #2 2 eE'' eF 2 2 2 OFFICE 1.56 2 TOILET 1.50 2 LOCKERS 1.49 GRADE 2 1.36 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: KITCHEN 1.61 2 1 COOLER 1.57 2 2 eH eI eH eI OFFICE 1.62 FREEZER 1.58 KINDERGARTEN 1.31 2 CONNECT NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES TO EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THIS AREA. 1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UNISTALL AND REINSTALL EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES, LIGHTING DEVICES, EXIT SIGNS ETC. AS REQUIRED DUE TO CEILING REPLACEMENT. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE RE-INSTALLED AT SAME LOCATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING REFLECTED PLANS DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE OF WORK. SEE GENERAL NOTE "G" FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3 PROVIDE NEW OCCUPANCY SENSOR. 4 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REVISE EXISTING LIHTING FIXTURE CIRCUITRY TO ACCOMPLISH NEW SWITCHING. 2 SERVING 1.63 eJ 2 DRESSING SERVING ? eJ 1.59 2 2 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 2 STORAGE 2 1.48 KINDERGARTEN 1.37 # Revision / 1 GRADE 2 1.32 Date 12/1/16 eF TLT 1.30 OC 1 2 D 2 2 eK eK 2 eL eL ARTROOM 1.43 I.S.S. 2.39 2 TESTING 1.27 SPEECH 1.28 2 2 BOYS 1.41 2 2 2 2 2 GIRLS 1.42 eM CORRIDOR 1.47 eM eN eN 2 2 2 2 eO eO 2 CAFETERIA 1.06 CORRIDOR 1.07 BOOKROOM 1.25 2 e29 e29 2 2 Project: 2 2 2 MUSIC ROOM 1.12 MECH. 1.11 eP eP BOYS 1.09 2 STORAGE 1.05 2 eQ 2 eQ STORAGE 1.02 KINDERGARTEN 1.24 2 S1 2 1 RISER 1.02B 2 2 eR S1E eR 2 2 1 STOR 1.16 MUSIC OFFICE 1.15 eS eS D 2 OC eT OC 1 TOILET 1.21 D 1 OC TOILET D 1.22 OC eU eT 4 STOR 1.23 3 eU C:\Users\rflores\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_rflores.rvt 2 eV eV 1 LIGHTING PLAN - SECTION 1 2 2 EL2.1 PRE−K 1.18 1/8" = 1'-0" KINDERGARTEN 1.20 LIGHTING PLAN - SECTION 1 eW eW 3 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 DBR Project Number e19 e20 e21 e22 e23 e24 e25 e26 e27 Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 e28 BM JG BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. EL2.1 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUP HOMERUNS WITH THREE HOTS (A,B, AND C PHASE), AND #10 NEUTRAL TO PROVIDE MULTI-WIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS. NO MORE THAN 2 MULTI-WIRE HOMERUNS PER CONDUIT. B.- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUIT, OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES FOR ALL TELEPHONE, DATA, CATV, SECURITY, AND CAMERA OUTLETS. REFER TO DIVISION 26 SPECIFICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ALL WORK REQUIRED. C.- HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MAY DIFFER FROM LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. D.- ALL RECEPTACLES MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTERS AND WITHIN 6 FEET OF SINKS OR LAVATORIES SHALL BE GFCI TYPE. E.- CONTRACTOR SHALL INDICATE CIRCUIT SERVING EACH RECEPTACLE BY PROVIDING TYPE WRITTEN LABELING LOCATED ON INSIDE FACE OF EACH RECEPTACLE COVER PLATE. F.- MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY DIVISION 26. G.- VAVS WITH DAMPER ONLY SHALL BE CONNECTED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. H.- REFER TO RESPECTIVE SIDE OF THE BOUNDARY MATCHLINE FOR THE APPROPRIATE FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES. I.- REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ALL DATA, SECURITY, SURVEILLANCE AND COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES FOR ADDITIONAL CONDUIT AND BACKBOX ROUGH-IN INFORMATION. J.- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ACCESS CONTROL PANELS WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE 120V TO ACCESS CONTROL PANEL FROM NEAREST AVAILABLE 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. CIRCUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 80% BREAKER RATING PER NEC. eC eC 8 12 GRADE 2 1.33 1 10 1 28 12 29 12 FCU 58 10 27 HHF-38,40,42 GRADE 2 1.35 HHF-37,39,41 (TYP. 3 OF 2) 8 12 8 6 P-2 6 P-1 (TYP. OF 2) eD 16 MSB eD 10 30 FCU 55 8 ADDENDUM #2 25 10 A.- 1 LF AHU-2 2 HHF-44,46,48 MDPA DOAU-5 eE eE 1 HHF-43,45,47 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: MDPB # Date 12/1/16 EDH-DOAU-5 12 MSBA FCU 59 eE'' 8 eF 31 DOAU-6 KITCHEN 1.61 3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED AND WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4 PROVIDE 120V POWER FOR DDC CONTROL PANEL. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 5 ROUTE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT WITH CONTROL WIRING TO ASSOCIATED CONDENSING UNIT OUTSIDE OF BUILDING. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND WIRING WITH MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE MOTOR RATED SWITCH TO INCOMMING POWER LINES FROM CONDENSING UNIT. 6 NEW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECT EXISTING TO BE REMOVED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT NEW EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO ROUTE EXISTING WIRING AND CONDUIT VIA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE AND TO NEW EQUIPMENT'S POINT OF CONNECTION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR REMOVAL. 7 CONNECT TO EXISTING 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT SERVING THIS AREA. 8 PROVIDE 10"X10"X4" JUNCTION BOX ANCHORED TO DECK OR STRUCTURE ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION PRIOR PLACEMENT. ROUTE (1) 3/4" LIQUID TIGHT CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING TO ASSOCIATED EXTERIOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA. 9 PROVIDE 1-GANG JUNCTION BOX 6" ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 10 JUNCTION BOX FOR OUTDOOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 11 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX FOR CEILING MOUNTED SURVEILLANCE CAMERA, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 12 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX WITH COVER ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING FOR SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE CONNECTION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH DOOR HARDWARE INSTALLER AND REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION PRIOR PLACEMENT. ROUTE (1) 1" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING TO ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. 13 CONNECT EXHAUST FAN TO EXISTING 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT SERVING AREA. TIE FAN TO EXISTING LIGHTING SWITCH SERVING THIS ROOM, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGHT-IN. PROVIDE MOTOR RATED SWITCH. 14 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING "HHF" PANELBOARD AND REPLACE WITH NEW 84 CIRCUIT PANELBOARD. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING WIRING AND CONDUIT BACK TO ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD AND REPLACE WITH NEW AS REQUIRED, REFER ONE LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET E3.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 15 NEW LOCATION OF EXISTING CONTACTOR "C11". ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO EXTEND CIRCUITS BEING ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTOR TO NEW LOCATION. PROVIDE WORKING CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED BY N.E.C. 16 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNET EXISTING DDC CONTROL PANEL AND RECONNECT NEW DDC PANEL AS REQUIRED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT TO NEW DDC CONTROL PANEL LOCATION. 17 PROVIDE NEW GFCI RECEPTACLES FOR ELECTRICAL DRINKING FOUNTAIN, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. CONNECT TO EXISTING 120V CIRCUIT SERVING DEMOLISHED DRINKING FOUNTAIN. BID THIS ITEM AS ALTERNATE #4. 18 PROVIDE 277V POWER FOR ELECTRICAL UNIT HEATER. FIELD COORDINATE 1 EXACT LOCATION AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. SAFETY DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED AND WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 9 COOLER 1.57 9 8 1 FCU 63 11 eH 11 eI eH eI OFFICE 1.62 KINDERGARTEN 1.37 10 ACCU-2 WP GFCI SERVING 1.63 7 eJ LEA-27,29 8 13 FCU-MDF-1 1 FCU 64 eK eJ M FCU 65 DRESSING 1.59 SERVING ? 5 1 TLT 1.30 PREP 1.54 STORAGE 1.48 26 KINDERGARTEN 1.31 FREEZER 1.58 12 M 2 eK TEF-1 AC GFCI eL eL I.S.S. 2.39 SPEECH 1.28 ARTROOM 1.43 1 FCU 67 TESTING 1.27 BOYS 1.41 1 GIRLS 1.42 FCU 76 12 GFCI eM GFCI 1 17 FCU 66 eN FCU 75 FCU 77 11 9 11 11 9 6 38 9 eM CORRIDOR 1.47 GFCI UP eN 1 7 1 1 HHF-61,63,65 eO eO BOOKROOM 1.25 LEA-25 4 1 e29 17 LFE 1 12 GFCI AHU-3 DOAU-12 HHF-62,64,66 e29 GFCI EDH-DOAU-12 GFCI TLFE 17 2 LCE TLE LE eP LEA 8 CORRIDOR 1.07 CAFETERIA 1.06 8 HHF C11 10 32 14 eP HHE 15 35 DPE MECH. 1.11 GFCI 12 HE TLCE MUSIC ROOM 1.12 STORAGE 1.05 DN 10 eQ 1 KINDERGARTEN 1.24 RISER 1.02B eR HHF-68,70,72 GFCI EUH-1 MUSIC OFFICE 1.15 TEF-1 AC GFCI DN STOR 1.16 TOILET 1.22 AC GFCI 13 eS eT 13 7 AC TOILET 1.21 GFCI eR 10 (TYP. OF 2) 8 33 M eT 7 34 eS STOR 1.23 M TEF-1 eU 7 1 FCU 74 eV eV 1 1 POWER PLAN - SECTION 1 FCU 72 PRE−K 1.18 EP2.1 1/8" = 1'-0" POWER PLAN - SECTION 1 KINDERGARTEN 1.20 1 3 FCU 73 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 12 8 eW eW 10 36 C:\Users\rflores\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_rflores.rvt 1 18 1 eU eQ STORAGE 1.02 7 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS FCU 62 EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITHIN THIS ROOM SHALL REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 10 LOCKERS 1.49 GRADE 2 1.36 2 eF 11 9 1 10 NEW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECT EXISTING TO BE REMOVED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT NEW EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO EXTEND EXISTING WIRING AND CONDUIT TO NEW EQUIPMENT'S POINT OF CONNECTION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR REMOVAL. Project: GRADE 2 1.32 1 Revision / 1 EDH-DOAU-6 eE'' DBR Project Number BM JG VOLUME Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. EP2.1 Copyright © 2015, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. e11 e12 e13 e14 e15 e16 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES e17 e18 A.- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUP HOMERUNS WITH THREE HOTS (A,B, AND C PHASE), AND #10 NEUTRAL TO PROVIDE MULTI-WIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS. NO MORE THAN 2 MULTI-WIRE HOMERUNS PER CONDUIT. B.- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUIT, OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES FOR ALL TELEPHONE, DATA, CATV, SECURITY, AND CAMERA OUTLETS. REFER TO DIVISION 26 SPECIFICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ALL WORK REQUIRED. C.- HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MAY DIFFER FROM LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. D.- ALL RECEPTACLES MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTERS AND WITHIN 6 FEET OF SINKS OR LAVATORIES SHALL BE GFCI TYPE. E.- CONTRACTOR SHALL INDICATE CIRCUIT SERVING EACH RECEPTACLE BY PROVIDING TYPE WRITTEN LABELING LOCATED ON INSIDE FACE OF EACH RECEPTACLE COVER PLATE. F.- MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY DIVISION 26. eE'' G.- VAVS WITH DAMPER ONLY SHALL BE CONNECTED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. eF H.- REFER TO RESPECTIVE SIDE OF THE BOUNDARY MATCHLINE FOR THE APPROPRIATE FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES. I.- REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ALL DATA, SECURITY, SURVEILLANCE AND COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES FOR ADDITIONAL CONDUIT AND BACKBOX ROUGH-IN INFORMATION. J.- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ACCESS CONTROL PANELS WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE 120V TO ACCESS CONTROL PANEL FROM NEAREST AVAILABLE 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. CIRCUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 80% BREAKER RATING PER NEC. 5 ACCU-1 eE 23 WP GFCI eE 2 LAA-40,42 3 eE'' 10 FCU-IDF-1 FCU 45 FCU 46 FCU 47 eH eH eI eI 7 NEW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECT EXISTING TO BE REMOVED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT NEW EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR TO EXTEND EXISTING WIRING AND CONDUIT TO NEW EQUIPMENT'S POINT OF CONNECTION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR REMOVAL. 2 CONNECT TO EXISTING 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT SERVING THIS AREA. 3 PROVIDE 10"X10"X4" JUNCTION BOX ANCHORED TO DECK OR STRUCTURE ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION PRIOR PLACEMENT. ROUTE (1) 3/4" LIQUID TIGHT CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING TO ASSOCIATED EXTERIOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA. 4 PROVIDE 1-GANG JUNCTION BOX 6" ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 5 JUNCTION BOX FOR OUTDOOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 6 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX FOR CEILING MOUNTED SURVEILLANCE CAMERA, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-REQUIREMENTS PRIOR PLACEMENT. 7 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX WITH COVER ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING FOR SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE CONNECTION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH DOOR HARDWARE INSTALLER AND REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION PRIOR PLACEMENT. ROUTE (1) 1" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING TO ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. 8 PROVIDE BACK BOX FOR DOOR RELEASE PUSHBUTTON IN FURNITURE SYSTEM. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR AND FURNITURE INSTALLER, REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION. ROUTE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FROM BACKBOX TO ASSOCIATED SECURITY DOOR JUNCTION BOX ABOVE ACCESIBLE CEILING. 9 PROVIDE BACK BOX FOR EMERGENCY DOOR LOCK DOWN PUSHBUTTON IN FURNITURE SYSTEM. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR AND FURNITURE INSTALLER, REFER TO TECHNOLOGY DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION. ROUTE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING FROM BACKBOX TO ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. 10 ROUTE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT WITH CONTROL WIRING TO ASSOCIATED CONDENSING UNIT OUTSIDE OF BUILDING. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND WIRING WITH MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE MOTOR RATED SWITCH TO INCOMMING POWER LINES FROM CONDENSING UNIT. 11 PROVIDE 20A @120V QUAD RECEPTACLE AND DATA OUTLET IN FURNITURE SYSTEM. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR AND FURNITURE INSTALLER FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-IN INFORMATION. 12 POWER AND DATA OUTLETS MOUNTED IN FURNITURE SYSTEM. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS WITH ARCHITECT AND FURNITURE SYSTEM INSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 7 1 12 24 5 22 5 1 eJ eJ 3 7 3 EDH-DOAU-11 HHF-56,58,60 eK eK EDH-DOAU-8 HHC-37,39,41 eL eL HHF-55,57,59 DOAU-11 DOAU-8 eM eM UP FCU 42 6 3 4 FCU 53 FCU 52 6 UP 4 FCU 54 1 FCU 44 1 1 1 7 FCU 50 FCU 48 eO eO EX EX EX 7 EX EX e29 EX EX e29 HHF-49,51,53 EX EX DOAU-7 EX EX 2 EX 9 1 FCU 78 7 DR EX DR HHF-50,52,54 6 EDH-DOAU-7 EL 1 3 1 1 8 11 4 13 3 EX FCU 51 EX eP 13 EX EX EX ROUTE UNDEGROUND (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FOR POWER AND (1) 1 1/2" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING FOR DATA CABLING FROM LIBRARY DESK TO NEAREST WALL AND STUB UP TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING, FIELD COORDINATE EXACT STUB UP LOCATION WITH FURNITURE SYSTEM INSTALLER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 2 EX FCU 49 EX 1 37 eP eQ eN 2 eN 1 1 1 Project: HHC-38,40,42 7 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE CONVERSION FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 1 13 # Date 12/1/16 1 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: 1 Revision / 1 LAA-36 ADDENDUM #2 M eF 5 5 EX eQ EX EX EX eR EX EX LEA-23 eR EX 3 11 3 EX eS eS 12 5 5 eT e11 e12 e13 eT e14 e15 e16 e17 e18 1 POWER PLAN - SECTION 2 C:\Users\rflores\Documents\150300-MontgomeryISConversion-MEP14_rflores.rvt EP2.2 1/8" = 1'-0" POWER PLAN - SECTION 2 3 2 9990 Richmond Avenue South Building, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 713.914.0888 p 713.914.0886 f TBPE Firm Registration No. 2234 1 DBR Project Number BM JG VOLUME Job. No. 1697-06-01 150300.000 BU/RF JC -- Drawn By: Author Date: 11/18/2016 Sheet No. EP2.2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. 03. PLASTIC TIE WRAPS ARE NOT PERMITTED AT ANY TIME ON THIS INSTALLATION. ALL CABLE ROUGH-IN AND DRESS-OUT WILL BE WITH VELCRO ONLY. ALL CABLES BUNDLED WITH PLASTIC TIE WRAPS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 04. DO NOT INSTALL ANY CABLES IN ANY CONDUIT SLEEVE, STUB UP, OR WALL CAP WITHOUT A PROTECTIVE BUSHING. CABLES PULLED INTO UNPROTECTED CONDUITS WILL BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. DO NOT INSTALL ANY CABLING INTO ANY CONDUIT THAT HAS NOT BEEN CONFIRMED TO BE BLOWN CLEAR. COORDINATE WITH THE ELECTRICAL PRIOR TO ROUGH IN OF ANY CABLING. XX# XX# DATA OUTLET(S) INSTALLED IN FLOOR BOX. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A FLOOR BOX. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 1" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO FLOOR BOX LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS. COORDINATE WITH MEP PLANS AND SHARE COMMON TRENCH. DIV 27 0000 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DATA CABLING TO FLOOR BOX, FACEPLATE(S) AND DATA JACK(S) TO EACH LOCATION SHOWN. REFERENCE DATA NOMENCLATURE FOR DATA OUTLET QUANTITY AND INSTALLATION HEIGHT AND TYPE. DOUBLE SIDED CLOCK LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE REQUIRED BACK BOX FOR DOUBLE SIDED CLOCK INSTALLATION FOR ROUGH-IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FINAL HEIGHT OF CLOCK PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 1" CONDUIT FROM NEAREST D ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO CONTRACTORS BACK BOX. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DOUBLE SIDED CLOCK AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. ALL CLOCKS ARE MOUNTED AT 8'-0" AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DATA OUTLET(S) INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING SPACE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 1-GANG BACK BOX 6" ABOVE CEILING. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL 6" OF 1" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM 1-GANG BACK BOX. DIV 27 0000 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DATA CABLING TO 1-GANG BACK BOX, FACEPLATE(S) AND DATA JACK(S) TO EACH LOCATION SHOWN. 07. DIV 27 0000 CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE DATA AND POWER LOCATIONS SO THAT DATA AND POWER ARE AT THE SAME HEIGHT AND SPACED 18"-24" APART UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. REFERENCE TECHNOLOGY AND MEP SHEETS FOR COORDINATION. 08. ALL CABLING INSTALLED IN AREAS WITH EXPOSED CEILINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A PROPERLY SIZED CONDUIT PATHWAY. CONDUIT PATHWAYS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. THE CONDUIT MAY BE PAINTED TO MATCH CEILING COLOR AS DIRECTED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 09. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE BIDDING CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW THE ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION DRAWINGS FOR ALL DEMOLITION AREAS. 1 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRE-TEST AND DOCUMENT ALL EXISTING TECHNOLOGY AND TELECOM DEVICES AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OF CEILINGS AND SPACES. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT IN ALL DEMOLITION AREAS FOR DEVICES, RE-INSTALL ALL EXISTING DEVICES IN NEW CEILINGS. 11. CONTRACTOR SHALL DOCUMENT ALL EXISTING CEILING TECHNOLOGY AND TELECOM LABELING ON EXISTING CEILING GRID. PROVIDE NEW LABELING PER DIV. 27 00 00 – 2.3 – C. 12. DIV. 27 0000 SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR STOPPING ALL TECHNOLOGY CONDUIT PENETRATIONS FROM WATER OR RODENT INGRESS IN ALL BUILDINGS UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. INTERCOM CABINET LOCATION IP INTERCOM AUDIO INPUT PLATE LOCATED UNDER RECEPTION DESK. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 2-GANG BACK BOX WITH (1) 1" CONDUIT TO NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COVER PLATE. OUTLET INSTALLATION LOCATION XX # # INDICATES QUANTITY OF DATA DROPS TO BE INSTALLED OUTLET INSTALLATION TYPE: AC - OUTLET INSTALLED IN CEILING SPACE AP - OUTLET INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING FOR ACCESS POINT CC - OUTLET INSTALL 18" ON CENTER AFF FB - OUTLET INSTALLED IN FLOOR BOX FN - OUTLET INSTALLED IN FURNITURE HD - OUTLET INSTALLED AT 44" AFF HG - OUTLET INSTALLED AT 12" AFF UNO MB - OUTLET INSTALLED 6" ABOVE MARKER BOARD ML - OUTLET INSTALLED 18" AFF IN MULLION PI - OUTLET INSTALLED IN CEILING FOR PAGING INTERFACE POS - OUTLET INSTALLED ABOVE WORK SURFACE FOR POINT OF SALES RW - OUTLET INSTALLED IN RACEWAY SC - OUTLET INSTALLED FOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA TV - OUTLET INSTALLED AT 60" AFF VP - OUTLET INSTALLED IN PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATE WS - OUTLET INSTALLED ABOVE WORK SURFACE X-X DR ADMINISTRATIVE INTERCOM PHONE LOCATION. DIVISION 27 TO PROVIDE REQUIRED CABLING. PA 05. ANY CABLING FOUND PAINTED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PROCESS WILL BE REPLACED AT CONTRACTOR EXPENSE. DIV 27 0000 CONTRACTOR WILL COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND PAINTER TO AVOID CONFLICTS. 06. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE BIDDING CONTRACTORS TO REFERENCE BOTH THE PROJECT DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. TOGETHER THEY FORM THE COMPLETE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PLEASE REFER TO THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS NOT INDICATED ON THE DRAWING SET. IC X-X INTERCOM PUSH-TO-TALK BUTTON LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL PTT (1) 1" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1-GANG BACK BOX INSTALLED AT 44" AFF. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL INTERCOM PUSH-TO-TALK BUTTON. S1 APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF FLUSH MOUNTED INTERCOM SPEAKER/HORN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 1" CONDUIT SLEEVE FROM NEAREST ADJACENT AND ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1GANG BACK BOX INSTALLED 12'-0" AFF UNO. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FINAL INSTALLATION LOCATION AND HEIGHT. NO POWER REQUIRED AT THESE LOCATIONS. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE HORN AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. S1 APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF CEILING MOUNTED INTERCOM SPEAKER LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CEILING MOUNTED INTERCOM SPEAKER. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND SUPPORT PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND TO TYPE OF CEILING. REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL RCP PLANS FOR CEILING HEIGHT AND TYPE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH MEP PLANS FOR DEVICES ON THE GRID AND IN THE CEILING SPACE. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE SPEAKER AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. DS INTERCOM SYMBOL LEGEND PROJECT ACRONYMS GB GS GUN SHOT SENSOR AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE INTO ONE OF THESE APPROVED BOXES: CARLON CA320 OR B232BR FOR IN-WALL INSTALLATION (TYPICAL) OR WIREMOLD NM2044-2HW OR V5744-2 FOR SURFACE MOUNT INSTALLATION (ATYPICAL AND CASE-BY-CASE). THE HEIGHT OF THE BOX SHALL BE 4"-10" BELOW THE CEILING BUT NO HIGHER THAN 10'-0"-12'-0" AFF FOR CEILINGS OVER 12'-0" IN HEIGHT. JB #XX JUNCTION BOX. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FOR COMMUNICATIONS AND (1) 1" CONDUIT FOR AV FROM ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO THE BACK BOX LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS. REFERENCE TECHNOLOGY DETAILS. KP KEY PAD AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1-GANG BACK BOX INSTALLED 44" AFF. COORDINATE POWER WITH MEP AT THIS LOCATION. ACCESS CONTROL CONTRACT SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SPECIFIED KEY PAD AT LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS. ACCESS CONTROL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT KEY PAD INTO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. MD MOTION DETECTOR AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND SUPPORT MOTION DETECTOR PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND TO TYPE OF CEILING. REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL RCP PLANS FOR CEILING HEIGHT AND TYPE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH MEP PLANS FOR DEVICES ON THE GRID AND IN THE CEILING SPACE. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE MOTION DETECTOR AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT MOTION DETECTOR TO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. MD 360 360 DEGREE MOTION DETECTOR AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND SUPPORT MOTION DETECTOR PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND TO TYPE OF CEILING. REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL RCP PLANS FOR CEILING HEIGHT AND TYPE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH MEP PLANS FOR DEVICES ON THE GRID AND IN THE CEILING SPACE. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE MOTION DETECTOR AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT MOTION DETECTOR TO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. RH DOOR POSITION SWITCH AT A ROOF HATCH LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY TO THE TOP OF THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR FRAME FOR A DOOR POSITION SWITCH PATHWAY. COORDINATE CONDUIT PATHWAY WITH CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A DOOR POSITION SWITCH AT ROOF LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLANS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT THESE DEVICES INTO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. RTE XX ACS DOOR NUMBER DOOR TYPE XX ACS XX XX PATH OF EGRESS DOOR NUMBER SI-M UNSECURED SIDE OF DOOR SECURE SIDE OF DOOR C:\Users\jkimsey\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_TECH_V16_jkimsey@cruxsolutions.com.rvt SI-R ACS CALLOUT LEGEND DOOR POSITION SWITCH REQUIRED IN SPECIFIED DOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO THE TOP OF THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR FRAME FOR A DOOR CONTACT PATHWAY. COORDINATE CONDUIT PATHWAY WITH CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A DOOR POSITION SWITCH AT ALL LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLANS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT THESE DEVICES INTO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. DOOR POSITION SWITCH NEEDS TO BE ON THE LATCH SIDE OF DOOR AT TOP NO MORE THAN 6" FROM EDGE OF DOOR. GLASS BREAKAGE SENSOR AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND SUPPORT GLASS BREAKAGE SENSOR PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND TO TYPE OF CEILING. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH MEP PLANS FOR DEVICES ON THE GRID AND IN THE CEILING SPACE. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE GLASS BREAKAGE SENSOR AT THE CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT GLASS BREAKAGE SENSOR TO THE INTRUSION MAIN PANEL. RD DOOR TYPE DOOR RELEASE BUTTON IN FURNITURE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE, INTO FURNITURE SPACE, ALLOWING FOR A SAFE AND SECURE PATHWAY. IF TRANSITION TO FLEX IS REQUIRED ENSURE THAT CONDUIT SIZES MATCH WITH NO ROUGH EDGES AND NO CABLING IS EXPOSED. COORDINATE WITH THE CONTRACTOR FOR ANY MODIFICATIONS NEEDED ON THE FURNITURE TO ALLOW FOR THE PATHWAY INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADD BUTTON BELOW DESK SURFACE AND WIRE INTO SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITH OWNER/OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ON FINAL LOCATION PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH-IN. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE BUTTON AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. DOOR RELEASE BUTTONS SHOULD NEVER OPERATE MORE THAN (1) DOOR. EL DATA SYMBOL LEGEND GENERAL PROJECT NOTES EXTERIOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA, “X-X” REFERS TO SECTION NUMBER - CAMERA NUMBER (SEE CAMERA SCHEDULE AND RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION). COORDINATE ALL FINAL LOCATIONS, HEIGHTS AND VIEWING AREAS WITH THE OWNER/OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO FINAL INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL USE SECTION 27 0000 SUPPLIED WORK AREA PATCH CORD TO CONNECT CAMERA(S). FAILURE TO COORDINATE ALL CAMERA LOCATIONS, HEIGHTS AND VIEWING ANGLES MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF CAMERA AND CABLING AT CONTRACTORS COST. EMERGENCY LOCK DOWN BUTTON IN FURNITURE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE, INTO FURNITURE SPACE, ALLOWING FOR A SAFE AND SECURE PATHWAY. IF TRANSITION TO FLEX IS REQUIRED ENSURE THAT CONDUIT SIZES MATCH WITH NO ROUGH EDGES AND NO CABLING IS EXPOSED. COORDINATE WITH THE CONTRACTOR FOR ANY MODIFICATIONS NEEDED ON THE FURNITURE TO ALLOW FOR THE PATHWAY INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADD BUTTON BELOW DESK SURFACE AND WIRE INTO SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITH OWNER/OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ON FINAL LOCATION PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH-IN. FAILURE TO COORDINATE MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF THE BUTTON AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. THERE ARE NORMALLY (2) BUTTONS; (1) AT RECEPTION DESK AND (1) ON THE WALL IN THE ADMIN AREA. EACH LOCK DOWN CABLE SHOULD BE HOMERUN WITH NO SPLICES TO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. PAGING AND INTERCOM SURFACE MOUNTED INDOOR/OUTDOOR SPEAKER LOCATED WITHIN THE BELL TOWER. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 1-GANG BACK BOX WITH 1" CONDUIT STUB TO NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING. SPEAKER RIGGING INSTALLATION SHALL BE RATED FOR OUTDOOR AND WIND RESISTANCE. MAINTAIN A SAFETY FACTOR OF 7:1. INSTALL SAFETY CABLE THROUGH ALL HARDWARE AND ATTACHED TO SECURE STRUCTURE. S6 INTERIOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA, “X-X" REFERS TO SECTION NUMBER - CAMERA NUMBER (SEE CAMERA SCHEDULE AND RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION). COORDINATE ALL FINAL LOCATIONS, HEIGHTS AND VIEWING AREAS WITH THE OWNER/OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO FINAL INSTALLATION . CONTRACTOR SHALL USE SECTION 27 0000 SUPPLIED WORK AREA PATCH CORD TO CONNECT CAMERA(S). FAILURE TO COORDINATE ALL CAMERA LOCATIONS, HEIGHTS AND VIEWING ANGLES MAY RESULT IN RELOCATION OF CAMERA AND CABLING AT CONTRACTORS COST. DOOR POSITION SWITCH AT A ROLL UP DOOR LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY TO AN ARMORED LOOP TO THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR FOR A DOOR POSITION SWITCH PATHWAY. COORDINATE CONDUIT PATHWAY WITH CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A DOOR POSITION SWITCH AT THE ROLL UP DOOR LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLANS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT THESE DEVICES INTO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. REQUEST TO EXIT (RTE) REQUIRED IN SPECIFIED DOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO BOTH SIDES OF THE DOOR FRAME FOR ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER (EPT). COORDINATE CONDUIT PATHWAY WITH CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE RTE TO THE EPT TO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL SECURITY INTERCOM MASTER STATION AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. MASTER STATION REQUIRES CATEGORY CABLE TO CONNECT TO CEU TYPICALLY LOCATED IN THE NEAREST COMMUNICATIONS ROOM. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1-GANG BACK BOX INSTALLED NEAR MASTER STATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND BOX HEIGHT WITH OWNER. MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 02. ALL CABLE BUNDLES WILL BE SUPPORTED EVERY 48"-60" OC WITH A J-HOOK OR OTHER APPROVED PATHWAY DEVICE. REF DIV 27 0000 SPECS AND DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL CABLING PATHWAY INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR WHO VIOLATES THESE REQUIREMENTS WILL BE REQUIRED TO REPLACE THE AFFECTED CABLE PLANT AT THEIR EXPENSE. SINGLE SIDED CLOCK LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE REQUIRED BACK BOX FOR SINGLE SIDED CLOCK INSTALLATION FOR ROUGH-IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FINAL HEIGHT OF CLOCK PRIOR TO FINAL ROUGH IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 1" CONDUIT FROM NEAREST S ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO CONTRACTORS BACK BOX. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SINGLE SIDED CLOCK AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. ALL CLOCKS ARE MOUNTED AT 8'-0" AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Date 12-02-16 ADDENDUM 2 XX# DATA OUTLET LOCATION(S) INSTALLED ON WALL. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE (1) 1" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM EACH LOCATION TO THE NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1-GANG BACK BOX. COORDINATE DATA AND POWER LOCATIONS SO THAT DATA AND POWER ARE AT THE SAME HEIGHT AND IN CLOSE PROXIMITY. DIV 27 0000 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL DATA CABLING TO 1-GANG BACK BOX, FACEPLATE(S) AND JACK(S) AS SHOWN ON PLANS. REFERENCE DATA NOMENCLATURE FOR DATA OUTLET QUANTITY AND INSTALLATION HEIGHT AND TYPE. Revision / 1 01. ANY DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO PROVIDE A GENERAL LOCATION AS REQUESTED BY THE OWNER. THE ELECTRICIAN WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFIRMING ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN AND IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY CONFLICTS WITH THE OUTLET PLACEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. Project: AC - ACCESS CONTROL AFF - ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AHJ - AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AV - AUDIO AND VIDEO BICSI - BUILDING INDUSTRY CONSULTING SERVICE INTERNATIONAL C - CONDUIT CD - CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CCTV - CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CO - CONDUIT ONLY (EMPTY CONDUIT WITH MULE TAPE) CP - CONTROL PANEL CU - COPPER DR - DOOR RELEASE EC - ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EF - ENTRANCE FACILITY EL - EMERGENCY LOCK DOWN EP - ENTRANCE POINT EPT - ELECTRONIC POWER TRANSFER ESS - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY FBO - FURNISHED BY OTHERS FCC - FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION GND - GROUND HC - HORIZONTAL CROSS-CONNECT HR - HOME RUN HVAC - HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING IBO - INSTALLED BY OTHERS IDF - INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION FRAME IEEE - THE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS ISP - INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER JB - JUNCTION BOX LV - LOW VOLTAGE MB - MARKER BOARD MC - MAIN CROSS- CONNECT MDF - MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME MH - MANHOLE MIC - MICROPHONE MMF - MULTI-MODE FIBER MD - MOTION DETECTOR MPOE - MAIN POINT OF ENTRY NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NEMA - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NIC - NOT IN CONTRACT NTS - NOT TO SCALE OC - ON CENTER PB - PULL BOX PM - PROJECTOR MOUNT PNL - PANEL POC - POINT OF CONTACT POE - POWER OVER ETHERNET POS - POINT OF SALE PP - PATCH PANEL RCP - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN RFI - REQUEST FOR INFORMATION RFP - REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL RMU - RACK MOUNT UNIT SMF - SINGLE MODE FIBER SMR - SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY SW - SWITCH TE - TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENCLOSURE TIA - TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION TMGB - TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR TYP - TYPICAL UG - UNDERGROUND UL - UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC UNO - UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UPS - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY USB - UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS VC - VOLUME CONTROL VP - VIDEO PROJECTOR WAP - WIRELESS ACCESS POINT WP - WEATHER PROOF Project No. 1697-06-01 PDS SEC AV DA JCW JCW JCW JF SECURITY INTERCOM REMOTE DOOR STATION AT SPECIFIED LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 3/4" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO A 1-GANG BACK BOX INSTALLED 44" AFF. COORDINATE POWER WITH MEP AT THIS LOCATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SPECIFIED AI PHONE AT LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT AI PHONE OUTPUT INTO THE ACCESS CONTROL PANEL INPUT TO SIGNAL DOOR RELEASE. ACCESS CONTROL & SURVEILLANCE SYMBOL LEGEND TECHNOLOGY GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS Job. No. 1697-06-01 STANDARD TECHNOLOGY LEGEND NOT ALL SYMBOLS AND NOTES MAY BE USED Drawn By: JF Date: 11/18/16 Sheet No. TG1.1 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. REFERENCE SHEET TG1.1 FOR ALL SYMBOLS AND PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES. F2-2 ACS X1.34 SHEET NOTES F2 C2 C2 ACS ACS ACS X1.51 X1.52 X1.53 01. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND ROUTE 1" CONDUIT PATHWAY FROM NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING TO THE CANOPY CAMERA LOACTION 9 1- F1 02. PROVIDE POWER AND DATA DROP FOR ACCESS CONTROL PANEL. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH CONTRACTOR. ACS X1.54 SC1 1.52 MECH. KEYNOTE LEGEND 1.51 YARD EQ./MAINT. X 1-10 1.53 MECH. Date 12-02-16 ADDENDUM 2 SC1 Revision / 1 1.54 PREP SC2 6 1- 7 1- 8 1- 1.64 SERVING 1.63 SERVING SC1 F1 ACS X1.47 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS 1.44 LOST & FOUND 02 D1 01 ACS 5 1- SC1 1.44 F2-2 ACS X1.06A 1.47 CORRIDOR UP 1-3 1.26 CORRIDOR SC1 SC1 1-4 SC1 1-11 1.06 CAFETERIA B2A-1 ACS X1.06B 1.07 CORRIDOR F1 ACS X1.07 Project: 1.12 MUSIC ROOM DN F1 ACS X1.12 1 1.24 KINDERGARTEN Project No. 1697-06-01 C1 ACS 1.02B DN SC2 1.02B RISER PDS SEC AV DA JCW JCW JCW JF 2 1- 01 1.01 STORAGE 1-13 SC1 1.19 COORIDOR 1.18 PRE-K SC1 F2-2 ACS 3 14 1- C:\Users\jkimsey\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_TECH_V16_jkimsey@cruxsolutions.com.rvt 12 1- 1 1- SC1 2 1 FLOOR PLAN - SECTION 1 X1.19 1 T1.2 FLOOR PLAN - SECTION 1 1/8" = 1'-0" N PLAN Job. No. 1697-06-01 4 KEY PLAN - 1ST FLOOR N.T.S. Drawn By: JF Date: 11/18/16 Sheet No. T1.2 Copyright © 2016, Huckabee & Associates, Inc. AWNING MOUNT AWNING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT AWNING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CORNER MOUNT WALL MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNT CORNER MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CEILING MOUNT CORNER MOUNT EXTERIOR EXTERIOR 1.47 1.06 EXTERIOR 1.63 1.64 1.54 EXTERIOR 1.34 1.26 EXTERIOR 1.19 EXTERIOR EXTERIOR 2.26 2.26 2.32 EXTERIOR EXTERIOR 3.06 3.58 3.46 3.27 3.22 3.16 EXTERIOR EAST OF STORAGE 1.01 EAST OF STORAGE 1.01 CORRIDOR CAFETERIA EAST OF CAFETERIA 1.06 SERVING SERVING PREP NORTH OF MECH. 1.53 CORRIDOR CORRIDOR WEST OF KINDERGARTEN 1.24 COORIDOR SOUTHEAST OF PRE-K 1.18 EAST OF OFFICE 2.17 CORRIDOR CORRIDOR LIBRARY EAST OF CLASSROOM 3.46 SOUTHWEST OF CLASSROOM 3.07 CORRIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR SOUTHEAST OF STORAGE 3.17 1 DOOR NUMBER DOOR TYPE OPENING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1.02B 1.44 2.15 2.16 2.33A 2.33B 3.41 X1.06A X1.06B X1.07 X1.12 X1.19 X1.34 X1.47 X1.51 X1.52 X1.53 X1.54 X2.16 X2.30 X2.32A X2.32B X2.37 X3.06 X3.16 X3.21 X3.27 X3.46 X4.01 X4.03 X4.04 X4.07 X4.11 X4.15 X4.16 X4.21 C1 D1 D1A F2-2 D1 D1 D1 F2-2 B2A-1 F1 F1 F2-2 F2-2 F1 F2 C2 C2 F1 F2-2 B1A-1 B1A-1 B1A-1 B1A-1 F2-2 F2-2 F2-2 F2-2 F2-2 F2-2 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 F2-2 SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE DOUBLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE SINGLE SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE SINGLE DOUBLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE SINGLE DOUBLE 1.02B 1.44 2.15 2.26 2.33 2.33 3.41 1.06 1.06 1.07 1.12 1.19 1.34 1.47 1.51 1.52 1.53 1.54 2.16 2.30 2.32 2.32 2.37 3.06 3.16 3.21 3.27 3.46 4.01 4.03 4.04 4.07 4.11 4.15 4.16 4.21 RISER LOST & FOUND WAITING CORRIDOR A/V MEDIA A/V MEDIA WRKRM CAFETERIA CAFETERIA CORRIDOR MUSIC ROOM COORIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR YARD EQ./MAINT. MECH. MECH. PREP LOBBY CORRIDOR LIBRARY LIBRARY CORRIDOR CORRIDOR CORRIDOR VEST CORRIDOR CORRIDOR LOBBY OFFICE MECH STOR STOR STOR MECH LOBBY HARDWARE TYPE LOCKING HARDWARE CR DPS DETAIL MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED INTEGRATED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED MECHANICAL LOCKSET - MONITORED INTEGRATED NONE ELECTRIFIED STRIKE ELECTRIFIED STRIKE LATCH RETRACTION ELECTRIFIED STRIKE ELECTRIFIED STRIKE ELECTRIFIED STRIKE LATCH RETRACTION NONE LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION NONE NONE LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION NONE NONE NONE NONE LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION LATCH RETRACTION NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE LATCH RETRACTION 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 1/T3.5 1`/T3.6 1`/T3.6 3/T3.8 1`/T3.6 1`/T3.6 1`/T3.6 3/T3.8 1/T3.4 1/T3.8 1/T3.8 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 1/T3.8 2/T3.8 2/T3.5 2/T3.5 1/T3.8 3/T3.8 4/T3.3 4/T3.3 4/T3.3 4/T3.3 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 3/T3.8 1/T3.5 1/T3.5 1/T3.5 1/T3.5 1/T3.5 1/T3.5 3/T3.8 MONTGOMERY INTERMEDIATE SCHOOL CONVERSION TO ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR MONTGOMERY I.S.D MONTGOMERY, TEXAS P3367-VE P3367-VE P3707-PE EVOLUTION 12 P3367-VE M3045-V M3045-V M3045-V P3365-VE M3045-V P3707-PE P3365-VE M3045-V P3707-PE P3367-VE P3707-PE P3707-PE P3707-PE P3365-VE P3707-PE M3045-V P3707-PE M3045-V M3045-V P3707-PE M3045-V P3365-VE ITEM ROOM DESCRIPTION ROOM ROOM NAME NUMBER Project: 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 LOCATION ROOM NUMBER ROOM NAME Date 12-02-16 ADDENDUM 2 SECTION CAMERA TYPE MOUNTING STRUCTURE CAMERA NUMBER ACCESS CONTROL DOOR SCHEDULE Revision / 1 CAMERA SCHEDULE C:\Users\jkimsey\Documents\1697-06-01_MontgomeryISConversion_TECH_V16_jkimsey@cruxsolutions.com.rvt Project No. 1697-06-01 PDS SEC AV DA JCW JCW JCW JF SECURITY SCHEDULES Job. No. 1697-06-01 Drawn By: JF Date: 11/18/16 Sheet No. T3.1